Home

ProSight SMB User Manual - Moonblink Communications

1. 185 Playback Slider and Buttons 185 Go To Time 185 Point and Click Control 186 PTZ Navigation Buttons 186 PTZ Preset Positions 186 IPIX PTZ Preset Positions 186 On All Tabs 189 On Live Tab Only 189 On Browse Tab Only
2. 52 Path 53 Days to Keep 53 INPUT EVENTS amp OUTPUT 61 Types of Events 61 Specifying Input Events and Output 61 I O Setup 62 Event Buttons 73 I O Control 77 How to
3. 29 Selecting Output for Manual Control 33 Selecting Output for Use on Motion Detection 34 Ceiling Mounted Cameras 42 Setting a View as Home Position 42 AUDIO SOURCE ADMINISTRATION 43 MONITOR ADMINISTRATION 44 RECORDING SERVER SERVICE MANAGEMENT 46 Pausing the Recording Server Service 46 Resuming the Recording Server Service 47 Stopped Recording Server Service
4. 80 OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 2 ARCHIVING 92 Storing Archives at Other Locations than the Default Archiving Directory 93 Archiving Audio 93 Archives Stored Locally or on Network Drives 94 Exported Archives 94 Specifying that Archiving Should Apply for Specific Cameras 95 Specifying Archiving Locations for Specific Cameras 95 CAMERAS NOT INCLUDED IN THE MONITOR APPLICATION 97 One Possible Scenario Avoiding Using Resources on Displaying
5. 8 Renaming a Camera 8 Assigning Shortcut Numbers to Cameras 9 EDITING SETTINGS FOR AUDIO SOURCES 9 DISABLING ENABLING CAMERAS AND AUDIO SOURCES 9 IMPORT OF DLKS 12 DEVICE ADMINISTRATION 13 CAMERA ADMINISTRATION 19 Adding Cameras 19 Configuring Cameras 20 Include Date and Time in Image
6. 128 NETGUARD EVS 131 Download Installation amp Login 132 Views 135 Further Configuration 146 Day to Day Use 160 NetGuard EVS s standard keyboard shortcuts 167 Logging Out 168 NETGUARD 169 If You Log in for the First Time 172 Logging in
7. 108 Assigning Cameras 108 Image Bars 109 Storing and Recalling Views 109 What to Do 110 What to Do 111 What to Do 112 De interlacing 113 Zoom Controls 113 Smoothening and Scaling
8. 190 WEB AND REALTIME FEED SERVERS 194 Web Server Setup 196 User Administration 197 Testing the Web Server Configuration 198 Starting the Web Server 198 Stopping the Web Server 199 Shutting Down the Web Server 199 Starting the Realtime Feed Server 200 Stopping the Realtime Feed Server 200 Shutting Down the Realtime Feed Server
9. 47 SCHEDULING 47 Set and Clear Modes 49 Zoom Feature 49 Good to Know when You Set Online Periods 50 Colored Bars 50 GENERAL SETTINGS 51 Changing the Administrator Password 51 Restricting Users Rights 51 Logfile Path 52 Days to Log
10. 179 Frame Rate 179 IPIX Split Mode 179 Apply to All 179 Point and Click Control 182 PTZ Navigation Buttons 183 PTZ Preset Positions 183 IPIX PTZ Positions 183 Master Time Area 184 Browse Buttons 184 Time Sliders
11. 200 LOGGING 206 REMOVAL 209 OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 4 Disclaimer Copyright 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI ProSight SMB NetDVMS NetDVR NetGuard NetGuard EVS NetPDA NetCell NetCentral NetTransact NetSwitcher and NetEVS are registered trademarks of OnSSI Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation All other trademarks mentioned in this document are trademarks of their respective owners This user manual is intended for general information purposes only and due care has been taken in its preparation Any risk arising from the use of this information rests with the recipient and nothing herein should be construed as constituting any kind of warranty OnSSI reserves the right to make adjustments or changes to its product specifications without prior notification OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303
12. 113 Viewer How to 114 REMOTE ACCESS 118 PROGRAMMING DIFFERENCES NET OR NOT 122 INSTALLATION DIFFERENCES 122 FEATURE DIFFERENCES 122 IMAGE SERVER ADMINISTRATION 123 Defining Users 124 Defining User Access Rights 124 NetGuard Users 128 NetGuard EVS Users
13. View HTML pages and static images which may be used for intuitively switching between different views in NetGuard How does NetGuard get Images from the Surveillance System Images viewed by NetGuard users are provided by the Image Server The Image Server runs as a service on the ProSight SMB server it does not require separate hardware The ProSight SMB system administrator uses the Image Server Administrator to manage NetGuards access to the surveillance system How can User Rights Affect Use of NetGuard The rights of individual remote users are specified centrally by the surveillance system administrator The rights of an individual user will determine the user s ability to use NetGuard s features Basically the surveillance system administrator is able to restrict a user s rights to the following Access to NetGuard Access to each of NetGuard s tabs Live Browse and Setup Ability to use features on NetGuard s tabs Ability to create views views determine the way in which images from one or more cameras are displayed Ability to view images from specific cameras The ability to use various features of NetGuard may therefore vary considerably from user to user Ask your surveillance system administrator if in doubt about your user rights OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369
14. Select between a number of language versions independent of language used on main surveillance system Note Some of the above features may require certain user rights Some of the above features may only be available if supported by the surveillance system How can User Rights Affect Day to Day Use of NetGuard EVS The rights of individual remote users are specified centrally by the surveillance system administrator The rights of an individual user will determine the user s ability to use NetGuard EVS s features Basically the surveillance system administrator is able to restrict a user s rights to the following Access to NetGuard EVS Access to each of NetGuard EVS s tabs Live Browse and Setup Ability to use features on NetGuard EVS s tabs Ability to create views views determine the way in which images from one or more cameras are displayed Ability to view images from specific cameras The ability to use various features of NetGuard EVS may therefore vary considerably from user to user Ask your surveillance system administrator if in doubt about your user rights Download Installation amp Login Logging in to NetGuard EVS is very straightforward So is the initial configuration of NetGuard EVS upon your first login in fact configuration may in some cases not be required at all To log in to NetGuard EVS do the following Double click NetGuard EVS shortcut on your desktop If no NetGuard EVS desktop shortcut is available select Ne
15. Tip To view non recent images from the selected camera try the Archives feature End Lets you quickly jump to the oldest or newest image from the recent database of the selected camera Clicking the left arrow will take you to the oldest image in the recent database of the selected camera Clicking the right arrow will take you to the newest image in the recent database of the selected camera Tip To view non recent images from the selected camera try the Archives feature Overview Lets you browse sequences from the recent database of the selected camera in which motion has been detected Overview browsing is based on thumbnail image representations of the sequences Clicking the left arrow provides you with an overview of the previous four sequences in which motion was detected with information about each sequence You are able to jump to a sequence by clicking the thumbnail image representing it Example of overview Likewise clicking the right button provides you with an overview of the next four sequences in which motion was detected with information about each sequence You are able to jump to a sequence by clicking the thumbnail image representing it Clicking the Overview link lets you browse the four sequence overviews For each click you are taken forward in time Alarms Lets you browse sequences from the recent database of the selected camera in OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillan
16. Lets you specify a name for the particular input event Note Event names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp Send email if this event occurs Select check box to send an e mail alert when the input occurs Note In order to be able to use e mail alerts the e mail alert feature must have been set up in the E Mail setup window Include image from camera Available only if the Send e mail if this event occurs check box is selected Select check box to include an image recorded at the time the input event is triggered in the e mail alert then select the required camera in the list below the check box Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The Edit Event window for editing input events lets you edit the settings for an existing input event on devices capable of handling one input event only Access You access the Edit Event window for editing input events by selecting the required device and clicking the Edit selected button in the I O Setup window Note that this only applies when the selected device is capable of handling a single input event only Some devices are capable of handling several input events in which case a different window the Multiple Input Events window will open when the Edit selected button is clicked OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveil
17. Tip You can also enable disable an audio source in the Administrator window right click the required audio source in the Administrator window s Device Manager section the select Disable or Enable from the menu that appears Note On some devices audio can also be enabled disabled on the device itself typically through the device s own configuration web page If audio on a device does not work after enabling it in the Administrator application you should thus verify whether the problem may be due to audio being disabled on the device itself OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 44 Monitor Administration Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights Installation dependent window Available only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service the Monitor Manager window is not available See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences The Monitor Manager window lets you specify which cameras to include in the Monitor application It also lets you configure the layout of the Monitor application Monitor Mana
18. button will open the New Timer window Associating Event Buttons with External Outputs As is the case with input events see External Input amp Output you are able to associate an event button with specific external outputs This way external output for example the sounding of a siren can be triggered automatically when an event button is clicked Like with input and VMD events the association between event buttons and outputs is made in the I O Control window Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The Add New Event window for adding event buttons lets you specify the settings for an event button Access You access the Add New Event window for adding event buttons from the Event Buttons window Select an entry either global or for a specific camera in the Defined Events list then click the Add new event button OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 76 Add New Event Window s Fields The Add New Event window for adding event buttons contains the following fields Field Description Button related to Read only field displaying the name of the camera for which the event will be specified If the field displays Global the event button wil
19. Click the gt gt button to move the selected cameras to the Viewable by selected user list For each camera now listed in the Viewable by selected user list specify the features to which the user should have access by selecting the features in the User Rights for the Selected Camera section Note that the features are listed in two columns the left column lists features related to live viewing the right column lists features related to browsing existing recordings In the Live column the following features all selected by default are available Live Ability to view live images from the selected camera PTZ Ability to use NetGuard s or NetGuard EVS s navigation features for PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras A user will only be able to use this right if having access to one or more PTZ cameras PTZ Preset Positions Ability to use NetGuard s or NetGuard EVS s navigation features for moving a PTZ camera to particular preset positions A user will only be able to use this right if having access to one or more PTZ cameras with defined preset positions Outputs Ability to trigger outputs e g switching on lights sounding sirens or similar if such outputs are available Events Ability to use NetGuard EVS s Event feature for manually triggering events Note The Event feature is available in NetGuard EVS only not in NetGuard Audio Ability to listen to live sound from the selected camera s audio source available only if selected camera has an aud
20. EVS Remote User s Feature Set Limited Feature rich Very feature rich Includes features otherwise only available in Monitor application Remote User s Ease of Use Easy to use Very easy to use Setup of camera views can be Very easy to use Setup of camera views can be handled locally as well as centrally With OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 121 handled locally as well as centrally With central views handling remote users can begin using their NetGuard instantly upon first login central views handling remote users can begin using their NetGuard EVS instantly upon first login System Administrator s Installation None the Web Server and RealtimeFeed Server are integrated in ProSight SMB None the ImageServer runs as a service on the ProSight SMB server None the ImageServer runs as a service on the ProSight SMB server System Administrator s Feature Set Limited configuration primarily through Web Server Very flexible configuration through ImageServer Administrator includes handling of local IP address ranges etc Very flexible configuration through ImageServer Administrator includes handling of local IP address ranges etc System Administrator s Access Control Options Limited
21. Failed to connect Please check the server address Issue It was not possible to connect to the surveillance system server at the specified server address What to do Verify that you have typed the correct server address Bear in mind that the http prefix as well as a port number is typically required as part of the server address example http 123 123 123 123 80 where 80 indicates the port number Consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt Failed to connect Please check the username and password Issue It was not possible to log in to NetGuard EVS with the specified user name and or password What to do Verify that you have typed your user name correctly then re type your password to ensure it does not contain errors Bear in mind that user names as well as passwords may be case sensitive i e there may be a difference between typing Amanda and amanda Consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt Failed to connect Maximum number of clients are already connected Issue The maximum number of remote access clients allowed to connect to the surveillance system server simultaneously has been reached What to do If possible wait for a while before connecting again If access to the surveillance system is urgent contact your surveillance system administrator who may be able to extend the allowed number of simultaneously connected clients OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net
22. info onssi com www onssi com Page 74 Defined Events List The Event Buttons window features a list of specified event buttons When event buttons have been defined you are able to expand elements in the list by clicking to get an overview of all defined event buttons global event buttons as well as event buttons specified for individual cameras Example Expanded Defined Event list A global event button with an associated timer event has been specified Also two event buttons have been specified for an individual camera Specifying Event Buttons and Timer Events To specify an event button first determine whether you want the event button to be available globally or for a particular camera only Note Only eight event buttons can be displayed at a time in the Monitor application When specifying event buttons for individual cameras bear in mind that global event buttons are displayed for all cameras If you have already defined for example three global event buttons you will be able to specify a maximum of five event buttons for each individual camera before you reach the maximum of eight displayable event buttons In NetGuard EVS users select manually triggered events from a list rather than by clicking event buttons NetGuard EVS is thus able to display an unlimited number of events for manual triggering for simplicity reasons also referred to here as event buttons Specifying Global Event Buttons To specify a gl
23. www onssi com Page 117 Select whether timestamps from the surveillance system should be added to the exported JPGs Click Next to start the export Installation dependent features The Viewer is only available from the Monitor when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service the features described in the following will not be available from the Monitor application See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences NetGuard EVS You are able to view archived recordings in the Viewer alternatively use NetGuard EVS You are able to use all of Viewer s features browsing evidence export etc for archived recordings as well Viewing Recordings from Exported Archives For exported archives e g archives stored on a CD you click the browse button in the Viewer s Database Information control panel to browse for the archive you want to view Once you have specified the required archive this way you can use all of the Viewer s image browsing features for navigating the recordings in the archive Remote Access Remote users can access a ProSight SMB surveillance system in different ways With NetGuard can be installed locally or run from server good selection of standard features Example of NetGuard user interface With NetGuard EVS installed locally very feature rich based
24. www onssi com Page 56 Email Settings Clicking the Email Settings button opens the E Mail setup window in which you enable and configure the use of e mail alerts Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The Change Password window lets you change the administrator password for your ProSight SMB solution The Change Password window Access To access the Change Password window click the Change Password button in the General Settings window How to Change the Administrator Password To change the administrator password do the following 1 Specify the current administrator password in the Old password field 2 Specify the new administrator password in the New password field 3 Repeat the new administrator password in the New password confirm field 4 Click OK Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights Installation dependent window Available only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service this window is not available See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences The Joystick Setup window lets you configure joystick control of PTZ cameras in the Monitor ap
25. 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 176 Tip A group whether private or shared can contain an unlimited number of views More than one private and shared group can exist Adding Cameras to the View Having created a view within a group you are able to specify which cameras should be included in the view Note Bear in mind that depending on their user rights not all users may have access to all cameras on the surveillance system Thus even though you may be able to view images from all cameras in a shared view other users may not necessarily be able to view images from all the cameras Consult your system administrator if in doubt To add cameras to a view do the following 3 In the Setup tab s Views section select the required view When you select a view the layout of the selected view is outlined in the main section of NetGuard window 2 In the Setup tab s System Overview section click the plus sign next to the required server to view a list of available cameras 3 In the list select a camera and drag the camera to the required position in the view When you have dragged a camera to a position in the view the name of the camera will appear in the selected position You will not see images from the camera yet as the Setup tab is only for configuration not for viewing images Repeat for each
26. 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 95 To remove an archiving time from the list select the archiving time to remove from the list and click the Delete button Note While archiving takes place cameras for which archiving applies will briefly stop recording one after the other Although the pause is very brief typically less than a second it is therefore recommended that you specify archiving time that outside periods in which you expect to record important images Time to add Lets you add an archiving time to the Daily archiving time list You specify the required time by selecting the hour minute and second values respectively then clicking the field s up and down buttons to increase or decrease values Tip You may also simply overwrite selected hour minute or second values Add Adds the archiving time specified in the Time to add field to the Daily archiving time list Delete Removes a selected archiving time from the Daily archiving time list Select cameras for which the archiving function should apply If the Archive Setup window s Enable Archiving check box is selected this section lists cameras for which archiving is possible The section lists all enabled cameras i e cameras which depending on their individual settings may transfer video to the surveillance system The secti
27. For further information see Using Background Cameras If Allow cameras to run in the background is not selected cameras must be included in the in the Monitor application in order to be accessible you include cameras in the Monitor application through the Monitor Manager window Start cameras on remote live requests Cameras may be stopped either manually in the Monitor application or because they have reached the end of an online schedule in which case NetGuard and NetGuard EVS users will not be able to view live images from the cameras However if Start cameras on remote live requests is selected NetGuard and NetGuard EVS users will be able to start the camera in the Monitor in order to view live images from the cameras Create default schedule for new cameras If selected default a schedule specifying that the camera is always online i e transferring images to ProSight SMB will automatically be created in the Camera Alert Scheduler window The automatically created schedule can be edited manually at any time If not selected no schedule will automatically be created meaning that the camera will not automatically be transferring images to ProSight SMB When required schedules can be added manually in the Camera Alert Scheduler window OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com
28. Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 5 Introductions ProSight SMB is an essential single server video system managing up to 25 cameras per server including flexible remote access tools ProSight SMB is Compatible with a wide range of different IP video products from the leading manufacturers so you choose the hardware you want in combinations too Dependable with robust and stable performance proven in operation on thousands of cameras worldwide Flexible with remote access features that let you use the surveillance system from any place and at any time Scalable with open architecture based on IP technology with ongoing development and regular updates which gives you long term returns on your surveillance investment Future safe the IP network approach is the foundation for tomorrow available today Several Targeted Components in One ProSight SMB consists of a number of components each targeted at specific tasks and user types The Administrator The main application used by surveillance system administrators for configuring the ProSight SMB surveillance system server upon installation or whenever configuration adjustments are required e g when adding new cameras or users to the system The Recording Server A vital part of the surveillance system recordings are only transferred to ProSight SMB while the recording server is running The
29. Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 65 Access You access the Add New Event window for devices capable of handling one input event only by selecting the required device and clicking the Add new event button in the I O Setup window Note that this only applies when the selected device is capable of handling a single input event only Some devices are capable of handling several input events in which case a different window the Multiple Input Events window will open when the Add new event button is clicked Note Before you specify input events for a device verify that sensor operation is recognized by the device Most devices are capable of showing this in their configuration interfaces or via CGI script commands Also check the ProSight SMB release note to verify that input controlled operations are supported for the device and firmware used Add New Event Window s Fields The Add New Event window for devices capable of handling one input event only contains the following fields Field Check Box Description External sensor connected to Read only field displaying the name of the device on which the input event is defined Sensor connected through Lets you select which of the device s input ports the sensor used for the input event is connected to Event occurs when input goes Lets you select whether input event should be triggered when t
30. To view non recent images from the selected camera try the Archives feature Motion Lets you browse images from the recent database of the selected camera in which motion has been detected Clicking the left arrow will take you to the previous image in which motion was detected unless the currently viewed image is the first stored image Clicking the right arrow will take you to the next image in which motion was detected unless the currently viewed image is the last stored image Tip To view non recent images from the selected camera try the Archives OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 203 feature Sequence Lets you browse sequences from the recent database of the selected camera Clicking the left arrow will take you to the previous sequence If motion was detected within the sequence you will be taken to the first image in which motion was detected within the sequence If no motion was detected within the sequence you will be taken to the first image in the sequence Clicking the right arrow will take you to the next sequence If motion was detected within the sequence you will be taken to the first image in which motion was detected within the sequence If no motion was detected within the sequence you will be taken to the first image in the sequence
31. Turns off the blinking green online indicator normally displayed for each camera in the Monitor application Keep Aspect Ratio Installation dependent feature Available only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service this feature is not relevant See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences If selected camera images in the Monitor application will not be stretched to fit the cells in the Monitor application s camera layout Rather images will be displayed with the aspect radio with which they have been recorded This may result in horizontal or vertical black bars appearing around the images from some cameras almost as when viewing a film in the widescreen format on a OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 55 regular TV screen Don t send e mail on camera failures If selected no e mail alerts will be sent if ProSight SMB loses contact with a camera Otherwise e mail alerts will provided the e mail alert feature has been enabled in the E Mail setup window automatically be sent if ProSight SMB loses contact with a camera regardless of any e mail alerts periods defined in the Camera Al
32. info onssi com www onssi com Page 99 Camera image enlarged detail shows image bar The image bar displays the name of the camera as well as the name of the device to which the camera is connected The device name is displayed first in square brackets followed by the camera name Each image bar also features three colored indicators Event indicator the leftmost of the three indicators solid yellow Lights up when events specified in the Administrator application occur Click anywhere inside the image to reset the event indicator This indicator may appear black if event indication has not been specified for the camera in question of if no specified events have occurred Consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt Motion indicator the indicator in the middle solid red Lights up when motion is detected in the image Click anywhere inside the image to reset the motion indicator Online indicator the rightmost of the three indicators blinking green Changes state every time an image is received from the camera Hot Spot If enabled in the Administrator application a hot spot provides you with an enlarged view of images from a selected camera When enabled the hot spot can either appear inside the camera layout or as a separate floating window If the hot spot is located inside the camera layout simply click inside an image to select the camera from which you want to view images in the hot sp
33. 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 87 External output name Specify a name for the output The name will appear on the button list with which users will be able to manually trigger the output Note that output names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp In the following example we have specified that a siren connected on a camera s Output 1 port should sound for five seconds when triggered Tip You are able to test the output by clicking the Test Output button When ready click OK This will return you to the I O Setup window 4 In the I O Setup window your newly defined output is now listed you may have to click the expand icon in front of the name of the camera or other device to see the listing Click OK to close the I O setup window and return to the Administrator window 5 In the Administrator window first select the camera for which the output should be available then click the Settings button This will open the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window 6 In the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window click the Outputs button OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 88 This will ope
34. 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 120 Yes Use NetGuard EVS access through the ImageServer NetGuard EVS offers more features for remote users than the other solutions No Use NetGuard access through the ImageServer Do you require a large amount of flexibility re remote users ability to export data Yes Use NetGuard EVS access through the ImageServer NetGuard EVS offers the ability to individual user rights permitting export evidence in the AVI movie clip JPEG still image as well as ProSight SMB database formats No Use NetGuard access through the ImageServer or regular browser access through the Web Server RealtimeFeed Server NetGuard offers the ability to individual user rights permitting export evidence in the AVI and JPEG formats With regular browser access through the Web Server RealtimeFeed Server users are individual user rights permitting able to export in the AVI format Will you use a Net based client application What is Net The Net software development platform allows the interconnection of computers and services for the exchange and combination of data and objects The platform makes extensive use of so called web services which provide the ability to use the web rather than single applications for various services This in turn provides the ability for centralized data storage as well as automated updating and synchronization of information The Net platform enhances software developers a
35. 4 0 views created in NetGuard EVS version 4 0 will not work in previous versions of NetGuard EVS If creating shared views in NetGuard EVS version 4 0 it is thus important that the users with whom you wish to share the views also use NetGuard EVS version 4 0 To create a view under a shared top level folder you first create a group under the required shared top level folder then create the required view within the group If you have created shared views before you may create the new view in an existing group or you may create a new group for the view Creating a Group To create a group under a shared top level folder do the following on the Setup tab In the Setup tab s Views section select the required shared top level folder in this example the required folder is simply called Shared OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 139 Click the Create New Group button A new group is created The new group is simply named New Group Overwrite the default name New Group with a group name of your choice You are now able to create a view within the group Creating a View within the Group To create a view in a group do the following In the Setup tab s Views section make sure the group in which you want to create the view is selected Click the Create New Vi
36. 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 193 HTML page with image map for navigating between views How you structure and create an image map is of course highly individual For this example we divided the floor plan into colored zones and defined an image map area for each zone This way users will be able to simply click a zone in order to go to the view displaying cameras from that zone For instance the red zone on our image map mirrors the Change to Group2 View2 button from the previous example When clicking the red zone users will go to View2 in Group2 Importing the HTML Page Importing an HTML page for navigation is no different from importing any other type of HTML page into a view in NetGuard The important thing to remember is that the HTML page should be stored locally on the user s PC To import an HTML page go to NetGuard s Setup tab From the Setup tab s System Overview section drag the HTML Page link to the required position in the required view This will open the Import HTML Page dialog in which you specify the required HTML page You are also able to specify a title for it the title will appear in the title bar of the HTML page when displayed in the view Depending on the navigation features you have included on your HTML page you may often want to import the HTML page into several views in order for the navigation to fully work OnSSI ProSig
37. 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 170 How does NetGuard Differ from NetGuard EVS For a description of how NetGuard differs from NetGuard EVS see Remote Access Overview Note Downloading and installation of NetGuard may not be necessary NetGuard may indeed be downloaded and installed locally on the remote user s computer but it may also be run directly from the ProSight SMB server If you choose to run NetGuard directly from the ProSight SMB server you simply access it through the internet see Accessing NetGuard When this is the case no downloading or installation is required NetGuard may also be installed from a software CD Downloading and Installing NetGuard If you wish to download and install NetGuard do the following 1 Open an Internet Explorer browser version 6 0 or later and connect to the URL or IP address specified by your system administrator in order to connect to the ProSight SMB server When you connect to the ProSight SMB server you will see a welcome page 2 In NetGuard section of the welcome page click the Download and install NetGuard locally link 3 Depending on your security settings you may receive a security warning Do you want to run or save this file When this is the case click the Run button 4 Depending on your security settings you may receive a further security warning Do you want to run this software When this is the case click the Run button 5 NetGuard Setup Wiz
38. Cameras Images in Monitor 97 Another Possible Scenario Hiding Cameras Images from Prying Eyes 97 Important Guidelines for Using Background Cameras 97 MONITOR APPLICATION 98 IMAGE BARS 98 HOT SPOT 99 Hot Spot with Carousel 99 MONITOR HOW TO 103 VIEWER 106 Selecting Grid Size
39. EVS window has three tabs Live Browse and Setup The Live tab is used for viewing live video the Browse tab is used for browsing recorded video and the Setup tab is used for configuring NetGuard EVS Depending on your user rights you may not be able to access all three tabs If You Log in for the First Time Determine Available Views If you have logged in for the first time you need to determine whether any views exist Among other things views determine how video from cameras is displayed in NetGuard EVS Views are thus required in order to be able to use NetGuard EVS One or more views may already have been created for you or you may need to create views yourself Read more about views including how to determine if any views have already been created for you in Private and Shared Views Logging in on Different Computers Your user settings are stored centrally on the surveillance system This means that your login can be used on any computer that has a NetGuard EVS installed If a problem or other issue occurs during login to NetGuard EVS you will see one of the following error messages You do not have access to any part of the application live browse or setup Please contact the system administrator Issue You currently have no access rights to any part of NetGuard EVS therefore you cannot log in to NetGuard EVS What to do Consult your surveillance system administrator who will be able to change your access rights if required
40. Edit Event Window s Fields The Edit Event window for editing event buttons contains the following fields Field Description Button related to Read only field displaying the name of the camera for which the event button has been specified If the field displays Global the event button is a global event button available for all cameras Manual event name Lets you edit the name of the event button Note Event button names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp Send e mail if this event occurs Select check box to send an e mail alert when the event button is clicked Note In order to be able to use e mail alerts the e mail alert feature must have been set up in the E Mail setup window Include image from camera Available only if the Send e mail if this event occurs check box is selected Select check box to include an image recorded at the time the event button is clicked in the e mail alert then select the required camera in the list below the check box Not applicable Not applicable I O Control Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights In the I O Control window you are able associate particular events and event buttons with one or more particular outputs This way you are able to define that when a selected event occurs or when a particular event button is clicked one or
41. Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 10 To disable a camera or audio source right click the required camera or audio source in the Device Manager section then select Disable When a camera or audio source is disabled it will be indicated as follows To enable a previously disabled camera or audio source simply right click the required camera or audio source in the Device Manager section then select Enable Tip Individual cameras can also be disabled enabled in the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name Window Individual audio sources can also be disabled enabled in the Audio Device Settings Window Administrator Window s Buttons The Administrator window features the following buttons Button Description Monitor Manager or Service Manager Installation dependent feature The Monitor Manager button is available only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application The Service Manager button is available only when the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences The Monitor Manager button opens the Monitor Manager window in which you specify which cameras should record and display images in the Monitor application It also lets you configure the layout of the Monitor application The Service Manager button
42. General Settings window s Event Recording Settings section Event log files should be viewed using the Monitor application s Viewer or NetGuard EVS Viewer Select the Viewer s Alarm Overview control panel then click the Events button to view the events log NetGuard EVS In the Browse tab s Alerts section select the required event then click the Get List button to see when the event in question was detected OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 207 Image Server Service Log Files These files log activity on the Image Server service A log file is created for each day the Image Server is used Image Server log files are by default placed in the folder containing the ProSight SMB software Image Server log files are named according to the structure ISLog_YYYYMMDD log e g ISLog_20070615 log Image Server Service Audit Log Files These files log NetGuard and NetGuard EVS user activity if audit logging is enabled in the Image Server Administrator A log file is created for each day with remote user activity Image Server audit log files are by default placed in a subfolder named ISAuditLog under the folder containing the ProSight SMB software Image Server audit log files are named according to the structure is_auditYYYMMDD log e g is_audit20070615
43. Global at the top of the list instead of a particular camera device OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 82 This will open the Add New Event window for adding event buttons 3 In the Add New Event window for adding event buttons the Button related to field will show the name of the selected camera or other device If you are adding a globally available event button the field will display Global Now specify information in the following fields Manual event name Specify a name for the event button Note that event names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp Tip If intending to use the event button in the Monitor application do not use a name consisting of more than approximately 10 characters as the Monitor s event buttons are quite small View example Event buttons in the Monitor can only contain a limited amount of text In this example the button is not large enough to contain a very long name Bear this in mind when naming event buttons Optional If requiring an e mail alert to be sent automatically when the event occurs select the Send e mail if this event occurs check box Note that in order to be able to use e mail alerts the e mail alert feature must have been set up in the E Mail setup win
44. Password To change the administrator password click the Change Password button to open the Change Password window When an administrator password is in use users accessing the Administrator application or wishing to use protected features must type the administrator password in the window before access is granted Restricting Users Rights To restrict how users who are not administrators use the Monitor application select the Enable Protection check box then select the features to which users who are not administrators should have access Installation dependent features The ability to restrict users access to the Monitor application is available only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service the ability to restrict users rights is not relevant See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences Application Startup Allows users to start the Monitor application without having to specify the Administrator password Application Shutdown Allows users to close the Monitor application Manual Control Allows users to start and stop cameras manually in the Monitor application Start Administrator from Monitor Allows users to open the Administrator application from the Monitor application without having to specify the administrator password Browser Al
45. ProSight SMB Rev 6 0 NVR and Camera Management Platform User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 222 Route 59 suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Phone 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 1 Table of Contents DISCLAIMER 4 INTRODUCTIONS 5 SEVERAL TARGETED COMPONENTS IN ONE 5 ADMINISTRATOR APPLICATION 7 ADDING DEVICES 8 EDITING SETTINGS FOR DEVICES 8 EDITING SETTINGS FOR CAMERAS
46. Some cameras however may only record if motion is detected Also there may be no recorded images from one or more cameras in the view matching the specified point in time When this is the case the last image in the camera s database prior to the specified point in time will be displayed in the view The Master Time area also displays the current playback speed example 1 00x indicating real time Browse Buttons The Time Navigation section s browse buttons lets you manually navigate through recordings from the camera selected in the view Previous image Moves to the image just before the one currently viewed Next image Moves to the image just after the one currently viewed Previous sequence Moves to the first image in the previous sequence Next sequence Moves to the first image in the following sequence First image Moves to the first image in the database for the selected camera Last image Moves to the last image in the database for the selected camera OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 185 Time Sliders The Time Navigation section s time sliders let you browse recordings simply by dragging the sliders handles Drag to the left to move backwards in time drag to the right to move forward in time Use the upper times slider for fine browsing within
47. Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 171 In NetGuard section of the welcome page select between three ways of accessing NetGuard Run NetGuard from server in full screen mode Lets you use NetGuard directly from the ProSight SMB server in full screen mode In full screen mode Internet Explorer s usual navigation buttons are not shown which means that more screen space is available for viewing NetGuard window If selecting this option you may be required to download the file full hta Downloading this file ensures that NetGuard will work properly in full screen mode Run NetGuard from server in browser mode Lets you use NetGuard directly from the ProSight SMB server in browser mode In browser mode you view NetGuard just like a regular web page in Internet Explorer Download and install NetGuard locally Lets you download and install NetGuard on your computer If you prefer this option see Downloading and Installing NetGuard Tip By selecting Remember my settings you can save your preferred access method e g browser mode and automatically use it the next time you connect This requires that your browser s privacy settings allow cookies to check your browser s privacy settings select the Tools menu then Internet Options then the Privacy tab on which privacy settings are determined in the Settings section Accessing a Locally Installed NetGuard If
48. Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 67 Available Input Event s list to the Enabled Input Event s list lt lt Lets you move an input event selected in the Enabled Input Event s list to the Available Input Event s list thus disabling it Edit Lets you edit the settings for an input event selected in the Enabled Input Event s list Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The Add New Event window for devices capable of handling several input events lets you specify the settings for a particular input event on devices capable of handling several input events Access You access the Add New Event window for devices capable of handling several input events by clicking the gt gt button in the Multiple Input Events window Note Before you specify input events for a device verify that sensor operation is recognized by the device Most devices are capable of showing this in their configuration interfaces or via CGI script commands Also check ProSight SMB release notes to verify that input and output controlled operations are supported for the device and firmware used Add New Event Window s Fields The Add New Event window for devices capable of handling several input events contains the following fields Field Check Box Description External event name
49. Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 135 New Client Available Update is recommended required The new version can be downloaded from Issue A new version of NetGuard EVS is available This message is typically accompanied by information about whether an update is recommended or whether it is a requirement for example due to recently introduced features not working in your current NetGuard EVS version The message will typically also contain information about where to download the new version from What to do Follow the advice given in the message Consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt In NetGuard EVS you are able to select between several language versions To select a language do the following Click the Show Application Menu button in the right side of NetGuard EVS s top bar From the menu that appears select Language then the required language NetGuard EVS must be restarted in order for the change to take effect Close your NetGuard EVS then log in again to use the new language version Views The way in which video from one or more cameras is displayed in NetGuard EVS is called a view A view may contain video from up to 64 cameras depending on the surveillance system to which you connect A NetGuard EVS can handle an unlimited number of views allowing you to switch between video fr
50. When you click the plus sign next to the device in the Defined events list and select a defined input event the Add new event button becomes available for defining timer events When clicked the button will open the New Timer window in which you are able to specify the settings for timer events Timer events are separate events triggered by the input event under which they are defined Timer events occur a specified number of seconds or minutes after the input event under which they are defined Timer events may be used for a wide variety of purposes the following are examples only A camera starts based on an input event e g when a door is opened a timer event stops the camera after 15 seconds A camera starts and the lights are switched on based on an input event e g when a door is opened a timer event stops the camera after one minute and another timer event switches the lights off after two minutes Add new output event Opens the Add New Output window in which you are able to specify a name for the required output event which of the device s output ports to use and how long to keep the output for Add VMD Event Motion Detection Lets you add a VMD Video Motion Detection event to the device selected in the Defined Events list OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 87
51. all of Viewer s or NetGuard EVS s advanced features image browsing smart search evidence generation etc for archived recordings as well Archives Stored Locally or on Network Drives For archived recordings stored locally or on network drives you simply use the Viewer s or NetGuard EVS s browsing features for example the timeline browser or the playback controls for finding and viewing the required recordings just like you would with recordings stored in a camera s regular database Exported Archives For exported archives e g archives stored on a CD you must use the Viewer Click the browse button in the Viewer s Database Information control panel to browse for the archive you want to view Once you have specified the required archive this way you can use all of the Viewer s browsing features for navigating the recordings in the archive Viewer is installation dependent The Viewer is accessed from the Monitor application which is only available when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service the Viewer will not be available See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences Note that if the Monitor application is not installed on your surveillance system you may still include a standalone version of the Viewer when exporting database content from NetGuard EVS Note Acce
52. and can therefore be used on any computer with a NetGuard EVS your joystick setup will be tied to your user login as well as to the specific computer on which you configured the joystick setup This means that your joystick setup will only work on the computer on which is has been configured The simple reason for this is that different computers are likely to have different joysticks attached If you want to use a joystick with NetGuard EVS on more than one computer you must configure NetGuard EVS s joystick setup on each computer You are able to assign your own custom shortcut key combinations to particular actions in NetGuard EVS Tip NetGuard EVS also features a small number of standard keyboard shortcuts immediately ready for use See Using Standard Keyboard Shortcuts for more information To assign custom shortcut key combinations do the following 1 Click the Show Application Menu button in the right side of NetGuard EVS s top bar OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 152 2 From the menu that appears select Keyboard Setup The Keyboard Setup window appears Keyboard Setup window 3 When the Keyboard Setup window appears click inside the Press shortcut key field then press the required key combination Note Custom key combinations must begin wit
53. are separate events occurring a specified number of seconds or minutes after the event button has been clicked Timer events may be used for a wide variety of purposes the following are examples only A camera starts when an event button is clicked in the Monitor application a timer event stops the camera after 15 seconds A camera starts and the lights are switched on when an event button is clicked in the Monitor application a timer event stops the camera after one minute and another timer event switches the lights off after two minutes To define a timer event for an event button select the required event button in he Defined Events list then click the Add new event button When you click the Add new event button while an already specified event button is selected in the Defined Events list the New Timer window opens allowing you to specify the required timer event Tip You may specify several timer events under a single event button However you cannot use a timer event under another timer event Editing Event Buttons and Timer Events To edit an event button or a timer event specified under an event button select the required event button or timer event in the Defined Events list then click the Edit selected button If you have selected an event button clicking the Edit selected button will open the Edit Event window for editing event buttons If you have selected a timer event clicking the Edit selected
54. be shared with other NetGuard EVS users It is not possible to share views across the two types of client Edit Private Views Ability to create and edit views in private groups in NetGuard NetGuard EVS Views placed in private groups can only be accessed by NetGuard NetGuard EVS user who created them for more information about views see Creating Views NetGuard and How to Create and Manage Views NetGuard EVS If a user does not have this right private groups in OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 130 NetGuard NetGuard EVS will be protected indicated by a padlock icon Denying remote users the right to create their own views may make sense in some cases for example in order to limit bandwidth use Tip By clearing the View Live Browse and Setup check boxes you can effectively disable the user s ability to use NetGuard NetGuard EVS for example while the user is on vacation This would typically be a temporary alternative to deleting the user In the User Rights for Camera section s Defined Cameras list select each camera to which the user should have access via NetGuard NetGuard EVS Tip By pressing the CTRL or SHIFT buttons on your keyboard while selecting cameras in the Defined Cameras list you are able to select several or all of the listed cameras in one go
55. camera when displayed in the Monitor application NetGuard and NetGuard EVS OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 35 The Setup Notifications on Events window Access You access the Setup Notifications on Events window from the Camera settings for Device Name Camera Name window by clicking the Event Notifications button What Is an Event Indication In the Monitor and NetGuard NetGuard EVS three different color indicators are available for each camera a yellow indicator a red indicator and a green indicator When event indication is used for a camera the yellow indicator will light up when the specified events have occurred Event indications can be valuable for camera operators as they will be able to quickly detect that an event has occurred even though their focus was perhaps on something else the moment the event occurred Available indicators the yellow indicator serves as the event indicator Tip The other two indicators serve the following purposes The red indicator lights up when motion has been detected and the green indicator is used for indicating that images are received from a camera Specifying Events for which Event Indication Should Be Used To specify which events should trigger an event indication for the camera do the followi
56. camera displayed in the selected view position to the position s default camera ENTER Changes the cameras displayed in all view positions to the positions default cameras OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 168 lt view shortcut number gt ENTER Changes the selected view to the view with the matching shortcut number Example if the required view has the shortcut number 8 you would press 8 ENTER Note that view shortcut numbers may not necessarily be used If view shortcut numbers are used you will be able to see them in the Views section where they will appear in brackets before the views names View shortcut numbers are defined on NetGuard EVS s Setup tab ask your surveillance system administrator if in doubt 6 numeric keypad only Moves the view position selection one step to the right 4 numeric keypad only Moves the view position selection one step to the left 8 numeric keypad only Moves the view position selection one step up 2 numeric keypad only Moves the view position selection one step down Note Above listed shortcuts can be used when working with the following types of view positions regular camera positions hotspots carousels HTML pages Logging Out To log out of NetGuard EVS simply click the Log Out butt
57. camera supports PTZ preset positions Note that if the Monitor application or Recording Server service is running the button will not be available see the description of the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window for information about how to make the button available Why Use Preset Positions Defined preset positions can be used for making the PTZ camera automatically go to particular preset positions when particular events occur Defined preset positions will also become selectable in the Monitor application as well as in NetGuard NetGuard EVS allowing users of these applications to move the PTZ camera to the preset positions Absolute and Relative Positioning PTZ Cameras Your configuration options depend on whether the PTZ camera in question is of the absolute positioning or relative positioning kind Absolute For an absolute positioning PTZ camera you are able to define up to 50 preset positions All 50 preset positions can be used in NetGuard and NetGuard EVS However only the first 25 preset positions can be used in the Monitor application You define a preset position by moving the PTZ camera to the required position with the controls in the PTZ View section then naming the position in the window s Preset Positions section Relative For a relative positioning PTZ camera the number of preset positions will depend on the camera video server and PTZ driver used For some relative positioning PTZ cameras you w
58. com www onssi com Page 27 If no archives are present on the drive containing the camera s database the size of all camera databases on the drive will be reduced by deleting a percentage of their oldest recordings thus temporarily limiting the size of all databases When the recording server is restarted upon such database resizing the original database sizes will be used You should therefore make sure the drive size problem is solved or adjust camera database sizes to reflect the altered drive size Tip Should the database resizing procedure take place you will be informed on screen in log files and if set up through an e mail alert Motion Detection Settings The Motion Detection Settings section contains two buttons for configuring the camera s motion detection Button Description Motion Detection Opens the Adjust Motion Detection window in which you are able to specify motion detection sensitivity levels Motion Color Opens the Color window in which you are able to select a color to be used for highlighting detected motion when images from the camera are viewed in the Monitor application Note Highlighting of detected motion in the Monitor application requires that the Show Motion check box in the Camera Monitor Setup section is selected Exclude Regions Settings The Exclude Regions Settings section contains two buttons for specifying areas in the camera s images in which motion detection
59. contain no more than 600 000 records regardless of what maximum age has been defined Clear Database Click button to delete all records stored in the database for the camera in question WARNING Use with caution all records in the database for the camera will be permanently deleted As a security measure you will be asked to confirm that you want to permanently delete all stored records for the camera Records stored in archived databases will not be affected Note If the Monitor application or Recording Server service is running the button will not be available To make the button available do the following If the Monitor application is running shut it down If the Recording Server service is running pause it by clicking the Administrator window s Service Manager button then clicking the Pause button IMPORTANT No video or audio will be recorded while the Monitor application is shut down or the Recording Server service is paused Database path Specify which local directory the database for the camera should be kept in Example C videodata OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 26 To browse for a folder click the browse button next to the Database path field Note Even though it is possible to specify a path to a network drive it is highly recomme
60. example aa aa aa bb bb bb Type a subject text for the e mail Verify that the Image field lists the camera you require Type a message typically a description of the recorded incident OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 116 Click the Send button Installation dependent features The Viewer is only available from the Monitor when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service the features described in the following will not be available from the Monitor application See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences You are able to export entire video and audio sequences in different formats AVI file movie clip JPG WAV files image audio clip To export evidence from the Viewer use the following procedure Click the Export icon This will open the Export control panel The Export control panel In the Export control panel s Video Feed and Audio Feed lists select the camera and if required audio source you want to export Tip With the options Current Video Feed s and Current Audio Feed s you can batch export all cameras and microphones in your current view Browse to the required start
61. have been added the first device has a single camera attached whereas the second device has four cameras attached Until you have added devices the Device Manager section will be empty Adding Devices You add devices through an intuitive Device Setup Wizard available by clicking the Administrator window s Add Device button see also How to Add a Device When devices have been added they will be listed in the Device Manager section Clicking the plus sign next to a device in the Device Manager section will list cameras attached to the device Editing Settings for Devices To edit settings for a device listed in the Device Manager section select the device then click the Edit device button to open the Edit device settings window Editing Settings for Cameras To edit the settings for a camera listed in the Device Manager section click the plus sign next to the device to which the camera is attached select the required camera then click the Settings button to open the Camera Settings for Device name Camera Name window Renaming a Camera To rename a camera right click the camera name in question then select Edit from the menu that appears This will open the Camera Name and Number window in which you are able to overwrite the existing camera name with a new one OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fa
62. icon in the Viewer s toolbar This will open the Database Information control panel Select a camera slot in the camera layout by clicking the required slot In the Database Information control panel s Video Feed select the camera you want to assign to the selected slot An image from the selected camera will show up in the selected slot unless the selected time happens to be before the first recorded image from the camera Tip Your cameras may not all transfer images in a size that exactly matches the size of the camera layout s slots This may result in black bars around images from some cameras when displayed in the camera layout If you want to adjust the images from all cameras to fit the camera layout s camera slots select the Stretch Images To Fit check box in the Settings control panel This may distort some images slightly but will help you avoid any black bars around images If audio is enabled you may also select an audio source from the Audio Feed list in which case recordings from the selected audio source will be coupled with recordings from the selected camera Repeat for all cameras you want displayed in the camera layout OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 109 Image Bars Each camera slot in the camera layout is identified by an image bar locat
63. image bar located in the top of each camera image The image bar is blue When you select a particular camera in the view the image bar of the selected camera image becomes a lighter blue Camera image enlarged detail shows image bar The image bar displays the name of the camera as well as the name of the device to which the camera is connected The device name is displayed first in square brackets followed by the camera name Each image bar will display the word Live when live images are displayed and the word Stopped if the camera is stopped and live viewing is not possible Each image bar features three colored indicators Event indicator the leftmost of the three indicators solid yellow Lights up when specific events defined by the surveillance system administrator occur Click anywhere inside the image to reset the event indicator This indicator may appear black if event indication has not been specified for the camera in question of if no specified events have occurred Consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 182 Motion indicator the indicator in the middle solid red Lights up when motion is detected in the image Click anywhere inside the image to reset the motion indicator On
64. images The setting will apply for all cameras displayed in the hotspot OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 145 Adding Static Images Static images can be used in views for a variety of purposes for company logos for including floor plans or maps in the view for including photos of wanted persons etc To add a static image to a view do the following on the Setup tab Drag the System Overview section s Image link to the required position in the view Release the mouse button over the required position When you release the mouse button you are able to select the required static image file Adding HTML Pages Static images can be used in views for a variety of purposes for including company web pages navigation pages online map services link collections e learning pages etc Tip When an imported HTML page contains links it is highly recommended that the links have the target blank attribute example lt a href otherwebpage htm target blank gt Link lt a gt This will make the links open in separate windows which will help you avoid losing view of NetGuard EVS window itself due to a link opening a web page in the same browser window as NetGuard EVS To add an HTML page to a view do the following on the Setup tab Drag the System Overview section
65. in the left side of the Event window 2 Select the required event in the list of available events the list in the middle of the window 3 Click the gt gt button located to the right of the Available Events list This will copy the selected event to the window s rightmost list in which events associated with the selected preset position are listed When the selected event occurs or when the selected event button is clicked the PTZ camera will automatically move to the required preset position You are able to associate a preset position with more than one event Simply repeat the process for each required association To end the association between a particular preset position and a particular event simply select the required event in the window s rightmost list and click the lt lt button Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights Note Use of the IPIX technology requires a dedicated IPIX camera or a special IPIX camera lens with a special IPIX license key specified in the Edit Device Settings window IPIX is a technology that allows viewing of 360 degree panoramic images through an advanced fish eye lens The iPIX Camera Configuration window lets you configure the IPIX functionality of a camera The iPIX Camera Configuration window Access You access the iPIX Camera Configuration window from the Camera Settings for Device Name Ca
66. included the Viewer application in the export double clicking the file Browser exe in the Exported Images folder will open the Viewer application ready for viewing and browsing the exported database content Tip If you included the Viewer application in your export copying all files from the Exported Images folder to the root of a CD or DVD will make the CD DVD start automatically when the recipient inserts it Frequently Asked Questions about Exporting Can I export audio as well When exporting in the database format you are when the surveillance system supports audio able to include audio in the export Bear in mind that export in the database format is available when connected to selected surveillance systems only see Surveillance System Differences When exporting in the AVI or JPEG formats you cannot include audio Can I export digitally zoomed images If you used digital zoom prior to exporting you will when exporting in the AVI or JPEG formats be able to select whether to export the regular images or the digitally zoomed images When exporting in the database format it will not be necessary to make such a selection as recipients will be able to use digital zoom on the exported recordings Can I export IPIX recordings Yes provided your surveillance system supports the use of IPIX cameras i e cameras using a special technology for recording 360 images When exporting recordings from an IPIX camera be aware that it is
67. installation of NetGuard follow steps 1 and 2 in the removal procedure if NetGuard is not listed in the Add or Remove Programs window s list of currently installed programs NetGuard is not installed on your computer To remove NetGuard do the following Note If you are not a ProSight SMB system administrator it is highly recommended that you consult your system administrator before removing any surveillance system related software 1 In Windows Start menu select Control Panel and select Add or Remove Programs This will open the Add or Remove Programs window 2 In the Add or Remove Programs window s list of currently installed programs select NetGuard x x where x x refers to the version number 3 Click the Remove button and follow the removal instructions
68. installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service this feature is not relevant See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences If selected the camera s images will only be updated in the Monitor when motion is detected Disabled Cameras are by default enabled meaning that images from the cameras are by default transferred to ProSight SMB provided that the cameras are marked as online also default in the Camera Alert Scheduler window If required you can disable the camera When the camera is disabled no images will be transferred from the camera to ProSight SMB Note If the Monitor application is installed and images from a camera are displayed in the Monitor application configured in the Monitor Manager window the camera cannot be disabled When this is the case remove the camera from the Monitor Manager window s layout before disabling the camera Tip Individual cameras can also be disabled enabled in the Administrator window s Device Manager section Audio Source In the Audio source section you are able to associate an audio source with the selected camera Note The ability to associate an audio source with the selected camera requires that at least one audio source has been attached to a device on the surveillance system When an audio source is associated with a camera audio from the sou
69. it for an HTML page of your own When viewed in a browser our HTML page looks like this OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 192 HTML page with buttons for navigation We have saved the HTML page locally in this case on the user s C drive When the HTML page is to be used for navigation saving the HTML page locally is necessary because of security features in Internet Explorer When saving the HTML page locally save it at a location to which an unambiguous path can be defined for example in a folder on the user s C drive example C myfolder file htm Saving the HTML page on the user s desktop or in the user s My Documents folder will not work properly due to the way Windows constructs the path to such locations Example of an HTML Page with Image Map Navigation You may also create an HTML page with more advanced content for example an image map allowing users to switch between views In the following example we have kept the two groups and two views from the previous example Instead of using buttons we have created an HTML page with an image of a floor plan and created an image map based on the floor plan Viewed in a browser our HTML page looks like this OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route
70. list Alternatively you may select the camera in the view 2 Select the required date and time by using the controls in the Time Navigation section 3 Click the Print section s Print button This will open a separate window with a preview of the image to be printed as well as information about camera name image capture time print time and user name of the user printing the image You also have the option of including a user s note for example a description of the recording 4 Click the separate window s Print link to print the image and associated details Exporting Images With the Browse tab s Export section you are able to export recorded images in the AVI movie clip and JPEG still image formats See Exporting Video Evidence for detailed information about exporting recorded images With NetGuard you are able to quickly generate and export video evidence in the AVI movie clip and JPEG still image formats Note Depending on your user rights access to generating AVI and or JPEG evidence from some cameras may be restricted Note Date and time formats used when browsing recorded images may vary depending on your computer s regional settings Illustrations in this help topic and date and time formats used in these illustrations are thus for guidance only Note If exporting recordings from an IPIX camera be aware that it is only possible to export the fisheye view itself not a flattened IPIX view a 2 2 split IPIX v
71. logged and reduce the size of the audit log Default is ten seconds Tip Read more about ProSight SMB logging in About Logging Language Support and XML Encoding Section In the Language Support and XML Encoding section select the language character set used on the ProSight SMB server This will ensure that the right language and character encoding is used in clients communication with the server OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 126 Good to know Remote Viewing of Live Images from Stopped Cameras NetGuard and NetGuard EVS users are able to view live images from cameras even though the cameras in question are stopped This however requires that a particular setting in the Administrator application is enabled Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights To enable the required setting open the Administrator application and do the following In the Administrator window click the General Settings button This will open the General Settings window In the General Settings window s Advanced section select Start cameras on remote live requests Click OK The Image Server s Define local IP ranges window lets you define IP address ranges which the Image Server shou
72. mail Time btw mails minutes Specify required minimum time in minutes to pass between the sending of each e mail alert per camera Examples If specifying 5 a minimum of five minutes will pass between the sending of each e mail alert per camera even if motion is detected or events occur in between If specifying 0 e mail alerts will be sent each time motion is detected or events occur potentially resulting in a very large number of e mail alerts being sent If using the value 0 you should therefore consider the motion detection sensitivity configured for each camera in the Adjust Motion Detection window Testing Your E Mail Alert Configuration You are able to test your e mail alert configuration by clicking the Test button This will send a test e mail to the specified recipients If Include Image is selected the test e mail will have a test JPG image attached OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 61 Input Events amp Output Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights Input received from a wide variety of sources can be used to generate events in ProSight SMB Events can in turn be used for automatically triggering actions in ProSight SMB such as starting o
73. of time You are also able to specify if e mail alerts or sound alerts should be triggered if motion is detected during specific periods of time By default cameras added to ProSight SMB will automatically be online and you will only need to modify the Camera Alert Scheduler window s settings if you require cameras to be online only at specific times or events or if you want to use specific alerts Note however that this default may be changed by clearing the General Settings window s Create Default schedule for new cameras check box If the check box is cleared subsequently added cameras will not automatically be online in which case online schedules must be specified manually Access To access the Camera Alert Scheduler window click the Scheduler button in the Administrator window OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 48 Camera Alert Scheduler Window s Fields and Check Boxes The Camera Alert Scheduler Window features the following fields and check boxes Field Check Box Description Camera Lets you select a particular camera for which to specify or view a schedule in the window s calendar section Note Always verify that you have selected the required camera in the list even though schedules displayed in the calendar section may look and indeed s
74. on Different Computers 172 OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 3 Creating a Private Group 174 Creating a View in a Private Group 174 Adding Cameras to the View 174 Creating a Shared Group 175 Creating a View in a Shared Group 175 Adding Cameras to the View 176 Using Your Views on Different Computers 176 Image Quality
75. on the Net platform and thus highly flexible for future integration of plugins etc Example of NetGuard EVS user interface With a regular Microsoft Internet Explorer browser using ProSight SMB s built in Web and Realtime Feed Servers offer a very limited feature set recommended only for remote users on very slow connections Whether this remote access method works on you surveillance system depends on how your surveillance system was installed see Administration of Web Server and Realtime Feed Server for more information Example of user interface pro vided through regular browser The way remote access is handled at the surveillance system server end is different depending on remote access method OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 119 Server End Providing Access through NetGuard or NetGuard EVS Images viewed by NetGuard and NetGuard EVS users are provided by the ProSight SMB surveillance system s Image Server The Image Server runs as a service on the ProSight SMB server it does not require separate hardware The ProSight SMB system administrator uses the Image Server Administrator window to manage NetGuard and NetGuard EVS access to the surveillance system Server End Providing Access Through Regular Browser As an alternative to using NetGuar
76. opens the Service Manager window which lets you pause resume the Recording Server service Pausing the service is necessary in order to access some features for example configuration of PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras IMPORTANT While the service is paused no video or audio will be recorded Scheduler Opens the Camera Alert Scheduler window in which you specify online periods for each camera OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 11 You are also able to specify if cameras should go online when specific events occur e g when a door is opened and if e mail or sound alerts should be used if motion is detected during specific periods of time e g during working hours Tip By default all cameras are online at all times You will only need to modify scheduler settings if you require cameras to be online only at specific times or events General Settings Opens the General Settings window in which you are able to specify a number of settings related to Administrator password User rights Joystick setup for PTZ cameras E mail settings for alerts sent via e mail Log file settings Event recording settings Other advanced settings such as the ability to disable screen update in order to minimize
77. optional external access to the server for optional definition of IP address ranges which should be recognized as being local and for specifying a maximum number of remote users allowed to connect simultaneously The Server Configuration section contains the following fields and buttons Field Button Description Name Lets you specify a name for the server By default the name is simply Server You are able to change the default name NetGuard and NetGuard EVS users with rights to configure their clients will see the name of the server when they create views on their client s Setup tab Port Lets you specify a port number to use for the server The default port number is 80 You are able to change the default port number Enable Outside Access Select the check box if the server should be accessible from the internet via a router or firewall If selecting this option also specify the outside public IP address and port number in the Outside IP Address and Outside Port fields Note When using outside access the router or firewall used must be configured so requests sent to the outside public IP address and port are forwarded to the inside local IP address and port of the server running the Image Server service Outside IP Address Lets you specify a public IP address for use when the server should be available from the internet Outside Port Lets you specify a port number for use when the server should be available from th
78. or stopping recording on cameras triggering e mail notifications making PTZ cameras move to specific preset positions activating output etc An event may also trigger several actions simultaneously Tip If you are specifically looking for information about how to configure motion detection triggered activation of an output device only such as a siren a strobe light etc see How to Add a Motion Triggered Output Several types of events exist see About Input Events amp Output In the following you will see how to define an event based on ProSight SMB detecting motion on a particular camera VMD simply means Video Motion Detection Once the VMD event is defined you will be able to select it when further configuring ProSight SMB Note In addition to ProSight SMB s motion detection some devices also have their own capabilities for detecting motion configured in the devices own software typically by accessing a browser based configuration interface on the device s IP address Events based on motion detected on a device itself are not VMD Events they are input events since they are based on input from the device Note Your motion detection settings for the camera in question will entirely determine when motion is detected and thus when the VMD event will occur See the description of the Adjust Motion Detection window for more information Also note that in order not to generate an excessively high number of VMD events during periods
79. or the user can connect to the ProSight SMB server and run NetGuard straight from the server NetGuard EVS must always be installed on the remote user s computer Net Framework 2 0 downloadable from http www microsoft com downloads is required on computers running NetGuard EVS Feature Differences NetGuard EVS offers considerably more advanced features than NetGuard For information about the features of each client refer to NetGuard Introduction and NetGuard EVS Introduction OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 123 Image Server Administration The Image Server provides access to the surveillance system for remote users logging in with NetGuard or NetGuard EVS The Image Server itself does not require separate hardware it runs as a service on the surveillance system server i e the computer running the ProSight SMB software Surveillance system administrators use the ImageServer Administrator window to manage the Image Server s settings Access To access the ImageServer Administrator window double click the Image Server Administrator desktop shortcut Each section of the ImageServer Administrator window is described in the following Server Configuration Section The Server Configuration section is used for specifying server name and port for enabling
80. output on the same device on several servers This applies even for dedicated I O devices see also Using Dedicated I O Devices In addition to IP video camera devices and IP video server devices it is possible to add a number of dedicated I O input output devices to ProSight SMB see How to Add a Device For information about which I O devices are supported refer to the release note OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 62 When such I O devices are added input on the I O devices can be used to generate events in ProSight SMB and events in ProSight SMB can be used for activating output on the I O devices This means that I O devices can be used in your events based system setup in the same way as a camera Note When using some I O devices it is necessary for the surveillance system to regularly check the state of the devices input ports in order to detect whether input has been received Such state checking at regular intervals is called polling The interval between state checks called a polling frequency is specified in the Advanced window For such I O devices the polling frequency should be set to the lowest possible value one tenth of a second between state checks For information about which I O devices require polling see the release note I O Setup Note
81. per second you will experience an average of 1 frame per second when viewing video from the camera on your NetGuard EVS s Live tab If your administrator had configured the camera with a feed as low as 4 frames per second you would with Frame Rate set to Low in your NetGuard EVS experience an average of 0 2 frames per second when viewing video from the camera on the Live tab IPIX Split Mode Available only if the selected camera is an IPIX camera IPIX is a technology that allows creation and viewing of 360 degree panoramic images NetGuard EVS supports up to four different viewpoints from a single IPIX camera The IPIX Split Mode list lets you select the required spilt mode One by One lets you view a single viewpoint Two by Two lets you view four different viewpoints at a time When viewed on any of NetGuard EVS s tabs the IPIX camera will appear as specified with either one or four viewpoints from the same image Tip When viewing different viewpoints from an IPIX camera on the Live or Browse tabs you are able to navigate each viewpoint independently by clicking inside each viewpoint or by using the buttons in the Live or Browse tabs PTZ Control sections OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 148 Maintain Image Aspect Ratio If check box is
82. per second when viewing video from the camera in the carousel If your administrator had configured a camera with a feed as low as 4 frames per second you would with Frame Rate set to Low in your NetGuard EVS experience an average of 0 2 frames per second when viewing video from the camera in the carousel Maintain Image Aspect Ratio If check box is selected the cameras original image aspect ratio will be maintained this will provide you with non distorted images but may lead to black bars appearing above below images If check box is cleared images will be stretched to fit the carousel this may lead to slightly distorted images but you will avoid any black bars appearing around the images The setting will apply for all cameras included in the carousel Interval seconds Specify the interval between the carousel s camera changes The setting will apply for changes between all the cameras included in the carousel it is not possible to specify particular intervals for changes between particular cameras Tip You are able to use several carousels in a single view Adding Hotspots With a hotspot users will be able to select a camera in the view and view enlarged and or higher quality images from the selected camera in the view s hotspot For the hotspot you would usually select a one of the view s larger positions for example the large position in a 1 7 view Advantages of Using a Hotspot The fact that you can view enlarged images in
83. preview image from the camera You define the areas in which motion detection should be disabled in the preview image which is divided into small sections by a grid To define areas in which motion detection should be disabled drag the mouse pointer over the required areas in the preview image while pressing the mouse button down Left mouse button selects a grid section right mouse button clears a grid section Selected areas are highlighted in blue Tip Even though areas in which motion detection should be disabled are always highlighted in blue in the Define Exclusion Regions window itself you are able to select a different color for the optional highlighting of areas with disabled motion detection when images from the camera are viewed in the Monitor application Such color selection takes place in the Select Color window Define Exclusion Regions Window s Buttons and Check Boxes The Define Exclusion Regions window features the following buttons Button Check Box Description Set All Lets you quickly select all grid sections in the preview image This may be advantageous if you want to disable motion detection in most areas of the image in which case you can simply clear the few sections in which you do not want to disable motion detection Clear All Lets you quickly clear all grid sections in the preview image Auto By clicking the Auto button you can make ProSight SMB automatically detect areas with noise insignificant
84. recordings should be indicated at the top or at the bottom of the timeline You specify this in the Settings control panel Tip Use 1 hour or 2 hour time spans for the best possible overview of recordings What to Do To browse recordings using the timeline browser click inside the timeline browser and move your mouse up or down without releasing the mouse button Browsing is fast when clicking outside the magnification area and slow when clicking inside the magnification area OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 111 Browsing Recordings with the Playback Controls The Viewer s playback controls are used for browsing and playing recordings just like on a video recorder Playback controls Click or to browse to the oldest or the most recent recordings from the selected camera Click or to browse to the previous or next motion sequence from the selected camera Click or to browse to the previous or next image from the selected camera Use to start and stop playback When playback is started all cameras in the camera layout will play back recordings Use to control the playback speed When the slider is in its middle position playback is real time regardless of the recorded frame rates Browsing Recordings with the Motion View Motion view l
85. setup for all joysticks attached to the computer running NetGuard EVS To customize joystick setup do the following Click the Show Application Menu button in the right side of NetGuard EVS s top bar From the menu that appears select Joystick Setup The Joystick Setup window appears In the Joystick Setup window select the required joystick in the Selected Joystick list The axes and buttons available on the selected joystick will be listed in the Axis Setup and Button Setup sections respectively Joystick Setup window displaying available axes and buttons on a selected joystick 4 In the Axis Setup section specify settings for the available axes With a joystick you are typically able to navigate camera images three dimensionally along three axes an X axis a Y axis and a Z axis where the Z axis typically refers to the depth zoom level OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 151 Example X Y and Z axes Invert By default a PTZ camera will move to the right when you move the joystick to the right along the X axis move up when you move the joystick towards you along the Y axis etc By selecting Invert you are able to change this to the opposite You are thus able to freely determine whether the camera should for example move up or down when
86. should not be used Button Description Exclude Regions Opens the Define Exclusion Regions window in which you are able to disable motion detection in specific areas of the camera s images Disabling motion detection in certain areas may help you avoid detection of irrelevant motion for example if the camera covers an area where a tree is swaying in the wind or where cars regularly pass by in the background Region Color Opens the Select Color window in which you are able to select between three colors to be used for highlighting areas with disabled motion detection when images from the camera are viewed in the Monitor application Note Highlighting of areas with disabled motion detection in the Monitor application requires that the Show Regions check box in the Camera Monitor Setup section is selected Image Quality The Image Quality button opens the Configure Device window in which you are able to configure image resolution compression etc for the camera OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 28 Event Notifications The Event Notifications button opens the Setup Notifications on Events window in which you are able to select events for triggering event indications for the camera when displayed in the Monitor application NetGu
87. specified the contents of the camera database will be moved to a default archiving directory called Archives The default archiving directory is located on the computer running the ProSight SMB software by default in the directory containing the ProSight SMB software In the archiving directory separate sub directories for storing archives for each camera are automatically created These sub directories are named after the MAC address of the device to which the camera is connected Since you are able to keep archives spanning many days of recordings further sub directories named after the archiving date and time are also automatically created The sub directories will be named according to the following structure Archives CameraMACAddress_VideoServerChannel DateAndTime Example With the default archiving folder located under C videodata images from an archiving taking place at 23 15 on 1st June 2005 for a camera attached to channel 2 on a video server device with the MAC address 00408c51e181 would be stored at the following destination C videodata Archives 00408c51e181_2 2005 06 01 23 15 OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 93 If the device to which the camera is attached is not a video server device with several channels the video server channel indication in t
88. syntax Live tab lt input type button value Buttontext onclick top selectPane live gt Browse tab lt input type button value Buttontext onclick top selectPane browse Setup tab lt input type button value Buttontext OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 191 onclick top selectPane setup gt Buttons for hiding showing NetGuard s standard navigation pane Required HTML syntax Hiding lt input type button value Buttontext onclick top showPane false gt Showing lt input type button value Buttontext onclick top showPane true gt Buttons for hiding showing NetGuard s standard title bar Required HTML syntax Hiding lt input type button value Buttontext onclick top showTopTitle false gt Showing lt input type button value Buttontext onclick top showTopTitle true gt Buttons for switching to a particular point in time in the Browse tab s time navigation Required HTML syntax lt input type button value Buttontext onclick top setTime Mmm dd yyyy hh mm ss gt In the following example we have created two shared groups in NetGuard We have called them Shared Group1 and Shared Group2 Each group contains two views called View1 and View2 We have also created an HTML page with examples of
89. the General Settings window s Logfile Settings section Administrator log files are named according to the structure AdminYYYYMMDD log e g Admin20070615 log Monitor Application Log Files These files log activity in the recording server when it runs as the Monitor application A log file is created for each day the Monitor application is used Installation dependent These log files are only generated when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service these log files are not generated See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences Monitor log files are by default placed in the folder containing the ProSight SMB software Note however that the location as well as the number of days to log can be changed in the General Settings window s Logfile Settings section Monitor log files are named according to the structure MonitorYYYYMMDD log e g Monitor20070615 log Recording Server Service Log Files Event Log Files These files log information about registered events read more about events in About Input Events amp Output A log file is created for each day on which events have occurred Event log files are by default placed in the folder containing the ProSight SMB software Note however that the location as well as the number of days to log can be changed in the
90. the surveillance system from a remote location Any NetGuards NetGuard EVSs in excess of the allowed number will receive an error message when attempting to log in Tip If required you can run an unlimited number of NetGuards or NetGuard EVSs locally on the computer running the surveillance system software Note A four minute session timeout period applies for client sessions on the Image Server When a NetGuard or NetGuard EVS user logs out four minutes must pass before it will be possible to log in again User Administration Section Accounts and rights for NetGuard and NetGuard EVS users are configured in the ImageServer Administrator window s User Administration section NetGuard and NetGuard EVS users must be defined in this section in order to be able to log in to the surveillance system Defining Users To define NetGuard and NetGuard EVS users click the User Setup button This will open the User administration window in which you define users Defining User Access Rights Once you have defined users you are able to define whether all users should have access to all NetGuard NetGuard EVS features and all available cameras or whether access should be restricted by user Full Access for All Users To give all users access to all NetGuard NetGuard EVS features and all available cameras select Full access for all users Restricted Access To use restricted access select Restrict user access Then click the User Access button
91. the Select cameras for which the archiving function should apply section Clicking the Set all button is thus a quick way to specify that archiving should apply for all cameras listed Remember that only when you click OK is archiving actually enabled for the selected cameras Clear all Clears the check boxes for all cameras listed in the Select cameras for which the archiving function should apply section Clicking the Clear all button is thus a quick way to specify that archiving should not apply for any of the cameras listed Remember that only when you click OK is archiving actually disabled for the selected cameras Set all paths Copies the selected path listing to all cameras listed in the Select cameras for which the archiving function should apply section If using the same archiving directory for all cameras this can save you having to manually specify identical paths for each camera Example You have specified the path C MyFiles videodata for a camera To quickly use this path for all cameras select the path listing and click the Set all paths button OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 97 Cameras Not Included in the Monitor Application Installation dependent feature The following information is relevant only when the recording server has been inst
92. to the Administrator window 10 Close the Administrator The defined output will now be triggered automatically when motion is detected by the selected camera Note that the automatic output triggering will be controlled entirely by your motion detection settings for the camera in question See the description of the Adjust Motion Detection window for more information Archiving Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights With the daily archiving feature in ProSight SMB you are able to keep recordings for as long as required You enable and configure archiving in the Archive setup window The Archive setup window also lets you specify where archives should be stored for each camera Benefits of Archiving By default information received from cameras is stored by ProSight SMB in a database for each camera The database for each camera see Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window is capable of containing a maximum of 600 000 records or 40 GB per day before the oldest records in the database are overwritten With daily archiving the amount of records you are able to store is limited only by the available hardware storage capacity By using archiving you will also be able to back up archived records on backup media of your choice using your preferred backup software How Archiving Works For each camera for which archiving has been
93. to use the SMTP server Username Field available only when Server requires login is selected Type the user name required for using the SMTP server Password Field available only when Server requires login is selected Type the password required for using the SMTP server OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 60 Specifying Default Subject and Message Texts Specify default subject and message texts in the following fields Subject text Specify required subject text for e mail alerts Message text Specify required message text for e mail alerts Note that camera information as well as date and time information is automatically included in e mail alerts Note If e mail alerts are enabled for the Viewer the content you specify in the Subject text and Message text fields will appear as default values in the Viewer s dialog for sending evidence via e mail Users will be able to overwrite these default values Specifying Image and Interval Options You are able to specify whether e mail alerts should include images and how much time should pass between alerts per camera Include Image Select check box to include images in e mail alerts When selected a JPG image from the time the triggering event occurred will be attached to each alert e
94. user rights primarily determined on a per camera basis Very flexible rights for accessing individual NetGuard and camera features are determined on a per user basis Very flexible rights for accessing individual NetGuard EVS and camera features can be determined on a per user basis Client Flexibility re Future Features and Plugins Very limited Limited Net based thus offering a high degree of flexibility for integration of new features plugins etc The client solution of the future Recommended Use Systems with remote users on very slow connections Systems on which installation of client software must be optional Systems on which a Net client solution is not desirable Systems on which the recording server has been installed as a service rather than as the Monitor application Systems on which a Net client solution is desirable Systems on which a high degree of flexibility e g use of remote access plugin features will be required OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 122 Specific Differences Between NetGuard and NetGuard EVS NetGuard and NetGuard EVS may initially look quite similar However the two clients are programmed differently they have different installation requirements and one client offers mo
95. when recordings from the camera are stored in the database are determined by the surveillance system administrator Sometimes the surveillance system administrator may specify that recordings should only be stored within particular time periods or when particular events occur This may explain why you are perhaps able to view live images from the camera on NetGuard EVS s Live tab while at the same time you may find that no recordings have been stored for viewing on NetGuard EVS s Browse tab No motion Indicates that motion is currently not detected in the camera s images the images you see will not be updated until there is motion This message will only appear if the surveillance system administrator has specified that images should only be updated when there is motion a feature which can help reduce server load and bandwidth consumption Consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt Not connected Indicates that it is not possible to connect to the camera for example because the camera itself is disconnected from the network Consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt Not initialized Indicates that the camera is not in an operative state Consult your surveillance system administrator if the problem persists The server is running out of disk space Indicates that limited disk space is available on the surveillance system server If more disk space is not made available on the surveillance system ser
96. which you want to create the view is selected Click the Create New View button OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 138 Select the required layout for your new view Example only You are able to select layouts for displaying up to 64 8 8 cameras in a single view Tip Some of the selectable view layouts are marked Wide These view layouts are especially suitable for widescreen monitors A new view is created under the group you selected The new view carries the default name New View plus an indication of the selected layout Overwrite the default name with a view name of your choice You are now able to add cameras to the view Tip A group can contain an unlimited number of views You may also create any number of subgroups if required Tip For information about adding content cameras etc to views see How to Add Content to Views Creating Shared Views Note Views are created on NetGuard EVS s setup tab Particular user rights may be required in order to access the Setup tab and in order to be able to create shared views When creating a shared view bear in mind that depending on their user rights not all users may have access to all cameras on the surveillance system Note Due to the large amount of new features in the latest NetGuard EVS version
97. you move the joystick towards you and away from you respectively Absolute By default joystick control takes place based on a relative positioning scheme This means that moving a joystick will move the joystick controlled object based on the object s current position rather than based on any fixed position By selecting Absolute you are able to change this and use an absolute rather than a relative positioning scheme Action Lets you select the required action for an axis Camera Pan Camera Tilt Camera Zoom or No action Preview Lets you quickly test the effect of your selections When you have selected an action for the axis you want to test simply move the joystick along the required axis to view the effect indicated by a movement of the dark blue bar 5 In the Button Setup section specify an action for each required joystick button You select the required action in the Action column Tip To quickly verify that you are configuring the required button simply press the required button on the joystick When the button is pressed a dark blue color will appear in the Button Setup section s Preview column for the button in question Disabling Joystick Use To disable the use of joysticks on your NetGuard EVS select the Joystick Setup window s Disable all joysticks check box Joystick Setup is Tied to User Login on Particular Computer Unlike your views and custom keyboard settings which are simply tied to your user login
98. you release the mouse button over the required position the Import HTML Page window opens OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 178 2 In the Import HTML Page window s Url field type the URL of the required HTML page example http www mywebsite com mywebpage htm Always include the http prefix or If the HTML page is stored locally on your computer specify its location on your computer example C myfiles mywebpage htm or click the Browse link to browse for the required HTML page 3 In the Title field you are able to specify a title for the HTML page The title will appear in blue title bar above the HTML page itself when it is displayed in the view 4 Select scaling for the HTML page either No scaling default or the required scaling 640 480 800 600 1024 768 or 1280 1024 5 Click the OK link Renaming Groups To rename a group do the following on the Setup tab 1 Select the required group in the Views section 2 In the Group Control section overwrite the existing name in the Group Name field 3 Click the Rename button Deleting Groups Note Deleting a group will delete all views within the group as well To delete a group do the following on the Setup tab 1 Select the required group in the Views section 2 In t
99. 0901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 157 6 Depending on the navigation features you have included on your HTML page you may often want to import the HTML page into several views in order for the navigation to fully work System Administrator s Check List Surveillance system administrators wishing to create and distribute navigation HTML pages to NetGuard EVS users do the following 1 Create the required HTML page The navigation controls in the HTML page must match the views users see in their NetGuard EVSs For example in order for a button leading to View1 to work a view called View1 must exist in users NetGuard EVSs If you intend to distribute the HTML page to a group of users the views in which the HTML page will be used should be placed in shared groups 2 Save the HTML page locally on each computer on which it will be used When saving the HTML page locally save it at a location to which an unambiguous path can be defined for example in a folder on the user s C drive example C myfolder file htm Saving the HTML page on the user s desktop or in the user s My Documents folder will not work properly due to the way Windows constructs the path to such locations 3 Import the HTML page into NetGuard EVS views in which it will be used 4 Test that the navigation controls on the imported HTML page work as intended 5 Enjoy simple and intuitive NetGuard EVS navigation tailored
100. 11 info onssi com www onssi com Page 64 VMD events are events triggered when ProSight SMB detects motion on a specific camera based on the motion detection settings defined in the Adjust Motion Detection window Note In addition to ProSight SMB s motion detection some devices also have their own capabilities for detecting motion configured in the devices own software typically by accessing a browser based configuration interface on the device s IP address Events based on motion detected on a device itself are not VMD Events they are input events since they are based on input from the device VMD events can be used just like regular input events For example a PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom camera could move to a specific preset position when a VMD event occurs Only one VMD event can be defined per camera In order to avoid the risk of an excessively high number of VMD events being generated a VMD event cannot occur more frequently than every five seconds The Add VMD Event Motion Detection button works slightly different depending on whether the selected device is a single camera device or a multi camera device such as a video server Single camera devices Clicking the Add VMD Event Motion Detection button will instantly add a VMD event to the selected device provided a VMD event has not already been defined for the device Multi camera devices Clicking the Add VMD Event Motion Detection button will open a simple d
101. 22 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 196 Web Server Setup The Settings window s Web Server setup section contains the following fields Field Description HTTP port Indicates the port used by the Web Server Default is port 81 Field is editable only when the Web Server is stopped Auto Start The Web Server must be started before it is active and remote users are able to connect to it The Auto Start check box lets you enable automatic start of the Web Server With automatic start enabled the Web Server will start automatically when you click the Web Server icon in the notification area at the far right of the Windows taskbar Web Server icon The use of Auto Start is recommended When automatic start is not enabled you must start the Web Server manually by clicking the Start server button in the ProSight SMB Web Server window You access the ProSight SMB Web Server window by clicking the Web Server icon in the notification area at the far right of the Windows taskbar Log Activity to File Select check box to log Web server activity in a log file The log file will be stored in the directory in which the ProSight SMB software is installed Days to log Available only if Log Activity to File check box is selected Lets you specify the number of days in which log files should be kept before they are deleted Default is ten days Tip Read more abou
102. 400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 96 Note You cannot archive to external drives only to a local drive on the computer running ProSight SMB If specifying another archiving directory than the default directory the directory you specify must exist You are not able to create new directories as part of the process Archives for the selected camera will be stored in separate subdirectories under the Archives directory at the location you specify The subdirectories will be named according to the following structure Archives CameraMACAddress_VideoServerChannel DateAndTime Example With the default archiving folder located under C MyFiles videodata recordings from an archiving taking place at 23 15 on 1st June 2005 for a camera attached to channel 2 on a video server device with the MAC address 00408c51e181 would be stored at the following destination C MyFiles videodata Archives 00408c51e181_2 2005 06 01 23 15 If the device to which the camera is attached is not a video server device with several channels the video server channel indication in the subdirectory named after the device s MAC address will always be _1 Example 00408c51e181_1 Is audio archived too If audio is enabled on a device audio from the device will also be archived If the device is a video server with several channels audio will be archived with the camera on channel 1 Set all Selects the check boxes for all cameras listed in
103. 5 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 25 Database Settings The database for each camera is capable of containing a maximum of 600 000 records or 40 GB per day Note that camera databases also store recorded audio from associated audio sources see Important Information about Using Audio for more information Tip By using archiving it is possible to store recordings beyond the capabilities of the camera s database The Database Settings section lets you specify database settings for the camera such as where the database containing the camera s recordings should be kept how much to store etc You specify this information in the following fields Field Description Max records in database Select this option to limit the database size based on a maximum allowed number of records in the database Specify required maximum number of records in the neighboring field When the maximum number of records in the database is reached the oldest record in the database will automatically be overwritten A database can contain up to 600 000 records Delete records older than Select this option to limit the database size based on the age of records in the database Specify required number in neighboring field and select required unit Minutes Hours or Days from the list When records become older than the specified number of minutes hours or days they will automatically be deleted Note A database can
104. 9 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 91 This will open the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window 7 In the All Outputs list in the window s left side select the required output then click the gt gt button located between the All Outputs list and the On Motion Detected list This will copy the selected output to the On Motion Detected list which lists all outputs to be automatically triggered when motion is detected by the camera Good to know You are not limited to selecting output connected to the camera itself If output has been defined on other cameras devices on the ProSight SMB system this output will also be selectable in the All Outputs list An unlimited number of outputs may be selected this way The Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window also lets you select output for manual triggering in the Monitor as well as NetGuard and NetGuard EVS This is further described in How to Add a Manually Controlled Output OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 92 8 When ready click the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window s Exit button to return to the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window 9 In the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window click OK to return
105. Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The I O Setup window lets you define input events VMD Video Motion Detection events and output for devices on your surveillance system When events occur they can trigger one or more actions Input events occur when input from an external input unit is received on a device s input port for example when an external sensor detects that a door is opened Some devices also have their own capabilities for detecting motion for detecting moving and or static objects etc configured in the devices own software typically by accessing a browser based configuration interface on the device s IP address in which case such detections from the device can also be used as input events VMD events occur when ProSight SMB detects motion on a particular camera Outputs are used for activating external output units for example for switching on lights or sounding a siren The I O Setup window is used for defining which input events VMD events and outputs should be available on your system Input and VMD events can be used for triggering outputs or for triggering various actions on the surveillance system itself such as for starting or stopping cameras configured in the Camera Alert Scheduler window or for moving a PTZ camera to a particular preset position configured in the Event window for PTZ preset positions on eve
106. Administrator window s Restrict user access option button Prerequisites Before you define user rights you should define users You do this by clicking the ImageServer Administrator window s User Setup button To define access rights for a particular user do the following in the Define User Rights window In the User list select the required user In the Global User Rights section select the user s global i e non camera specific rights View Live Ability to view the Live tab in NetGuard NetGuard EVS If a user does not have this right the Live tab will not be selectable in NetGuard NetGuard EVS Browse Ability to view the Browse tab in NetGuard NetGuard EVS If a user does not have this right the Browse tab will not be selectable in NetGuard NetGuard EVS Setup Ability to view the Setup tab in NetGuard NetGuard EVS If a user does not have this right the Setup tab will not be selectable in NetGuard NetGuard EVS Edit Shared Views Ability to create and edit views in shared groups in NetGuard NetGuard EVS Views placed in shared groups can be accessed by every NetGuard NetGuard EVS user for more information about views see Creating Views NetGuard and How to Create and Manage Views NetGuard EVS If a user does not have this right shared groups in NetGuard NetGuard EVS will be protected indicated by a padlock icon Note Views created in a NetGuard can only be shared with other NetGuard users Views created in a NetGuard EVS can only
107. CPU usage Installation dependent feature Note that some of the settings are only available when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service some of the features are not relevant See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences Archive Setup Opens the Archive setup window in which you specify ProSight SMB s archiving settings Archiving lets you keep recordings for as long as required limited only be the available hardware storage capacity Import DLKs Lets you import all required Device License Keys DLKs in one go thus avoiding the need to specify each DLK manually when adding devices See also How to Import Device License Keys Add Device Starts the Device Setup Wizard which guides you through the process of adding a new device See also How to Add a Device Edit Device When you have selected a device in the Administrator window s Device Manager section clicking the Edit Device button lets you edit settings for the selected device in the Edit device settings window Remove Device Lets you remove a device selected in the Administrator window s Device Manager section In order to prevent accidental removal of devices you will be asked to confirm that you want to remove the device Settings Lets you specify settings for a selected camer
108. Depending on your type of organization and work environment security restrictions may apply Consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt about whether it is safe to use this feature When ready click Connect Tip If a problem or other issue occurs during login you will receive an error message see Login Error Messages for more information Only relevant if you have logged in before if logging in for the first time move to step 6 NetGuard EVS will ask you if you want to keep the view s you last used Your options are OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 134 Main View If the check box is selected the view you last used in NetGuard EVS s main window will be restored If check box is cleared no view will initially be displayed in which case you must select the required view yourself Detached Views Available when connecting to selected surveillance systems only and only if you used views in primary display on secondary displays or in floating windows the last time you were logged in on the computer in question see Using Multiple Windows for more information If check box is selected the views you last sent to primary display secondary displays and floating windows will be restored After a short wait NetGuard EVS window will open NetGuard
109. Detected Motion Note Use of features in the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window requires that output has been defined in the I O Setup window You have a high degree of flexibility when associating a camera with particular outputs You are able to select between all available outputs i e outputs defined as output events for the camera itself as well as outputs defined as output events for other devices on the ProSight SMB system The same output may be used for manual control through an output button as well as for automatic triggering when motion is detected Selecting Output for Manual Control You are able to specify outputs to be triggered manually through output buttons in the Monitor application or from a list in NetGuard or NetGuard EVS Output buttons will become available in the Monitor when the camera is selected and the Monitor s Output button is clicked In NetGuard and NetGuard EVS users will be able to trigger outputs by selecting them from a list To specify an output for manual triggering in the Monitor or NetGuard NetGuard EVS do the following 1 Select the required output in the All Outputs list in the left side of the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window Tip When you select an output in the All Outputs list you can view detailed information about the selected output under Output Information in the lower part of the window 2 Click the gt gt button located between the All Ou
110. I and JPG export a user must have access to browsing recorded images Repeat as required for other users NetGuard EVS NetGuard EVS provides remote users with extremely feature rich access to the surveillance system NetGuard EVS must be installed locally on the remote user s computer Tip See system requirements for NetGuard EVS under System Requirements What are Remote Users Able to do with NetGuard EVS With NetGuard EVS remote users are able to View live video from cameras on the surveillance system Browse recordings from cameras on the surveillance system with a selection of advanced navigation tools including a highly intuitive timeline browser Listen to live or stored recordings from audio sources Note that audio is available when connecting to selected surveillance systems only Create and switch between an unlimited number of views each able to display video from up to 64 cameras from multiple servers at a time depending on the type of surveillance system you connect to Views can be placed in private groups only accessible by the user who created them or in groups shared with other users Use views private as well as shared on any computer that has a NetGuard EVS installed Create special views for widescreen monitors Use multiple screens as well as floating windows for displaying different views simultaneously Quickly substitute one or more of a view s cameras with other cameras View images from seve
111. Move to previous sequence HOME Move to first image END Move to last image In addition to displaying images from cameras NetGuard is able to display static images and HTML pages Such HTML pages may be used for intuitively switching between different views in NetGuard For example you may insert a clickable floor plan of a building and you would be able to simply click a part of the floor plan to instantly switch to a view displaying images from the required part of the building In the following you will see examples of HTML pages for NetGuard navigation a simple HTML page with buttons and a more advanced HTML page with a clickable image map For ProSight SMB system administrators wishing to create and distribute such HTML pages to NetGuard users a check list outlining the tasks involved is also provided Note The method described here requires a locally installed version of NetGuard Example of an HTML Page with Button Navigation A very quick solution is to create an HTML page with buttons for navigation You are able to create five categories of buttons on the HTML page Buttons for switching between NetGuard s views Required HTML syntax lt input type button value Buttontext onclick top changeView Groupname Viewname gt Buttons for switching between NetGuard s three tabs Live Browse and Setup Bear in mind that depending on their user rights some users may not be able to access all three tabs Required HTML
112. NetGuard EVS including the Viewer in the export will provide recipients for example investigators police authorities etc with a convenient tool for browsing the exported database content You are able to save particular configurations of the Viewer s camera layout as so called views and switch between them using the Views menu in the Viewer s menu bar For example you may store one view displaying images from 16 cameras and another view displaying images from eight other cameras Storing a View To store your current camera layout as a view do the following In the Viewer s menu bar select the Views menu In the Views menu select the Add to Views command This will open the Name of View window The Name of View window In the Name of View window specify a name for the view and click OK The view will now be selectable in the Views menu If storing several different configurations of the camera layout as views you will thus be able to switch between them using the Views menu Recalling a View To recall a stored view simply select the required view in the Views menu Editing or Deleting a Stored View To edit or delete stored views select Organize Views in the Views menu This will open the Views control panel in which you are able to rename views change the sequence in which stored views appear in the menu and delete views Installation dependent features The Viewer is only available from the Monitor when the recording s
113. NetGuard is already installed locally simply click NetGuard shortcut to access it Depending on your selections when installing NetGuard locally the shortcut is typically located in Windows quick launch bar next to the Start button occasionally it may be placed on your desktop NetGuard shortcut icon You may also access a locally installed NetGuard by selecting Start gt All Programs gt ProSight SMB NetGuard then selecting either browser or full screen mode Upon Accessing NetGuard Logging In When accessing NetGuard either running it from the ProSight SMB server or by opening a locally installed version you will be asked to log in To log in do the following 1 Specify your login information in the following fields Username Type your user name as specified by your system administrator The user name is case sensitive i e there is a difference between typing for example amanda and Amanda Password Type your password as specified by your system administrator The password is case sensitive Address Type the URL or IP address specified by your system administrator This will typically be the same URL or IP address you used if connecting to NetGuard through a browser although it may occasionally be a different one Port Internet connections may use different ports for different purposes Specify the port number your system administrator has asked you to use when logging in to NetGuard In most circu
114. OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 175 Tip If you want to use all of the cameras under a server you may simply drag the required server to the view this will automatically place all of the server s cameras in the view beginning at the selected position Remember to have sufficient positions available in the view Tip You can always change the cameras in your view Either drag the System Overview section s Clear link to a position in the view to clear the position or simply overwrite a position by dragging a different camera to the position 4 You are now able to use your view You may your user rights permitting select the view on the Live tab see Viewing Live Images and on the Browse tab see Viewing Recorded Images Tip In addition to cameras you are able to add static images and HTML pages to views See Further Configuration Creating Views in Shared Groups To create view in a shared group you first create a group then create the required view within the group If you have created views in shared groups before you may create new views in existing shared groups or you may create a new shared group for the view Note Views are created on NetGuard s Setup tab Particular user rights may be required in order to access the Setup tab and in order to be able to create shared views When creating a shared view bear in mind that depe
115. Specify export destination in the export dialog s Export Destination section Desktop If you select Desktop your exported file will be saved in an automatically created Exported Images folder on the desktop of your PC Path If you select Path you are able to specify a path yourself The exported file will be saved in an automatically created Exported Images folder under the path you specify example If you specify a path like C My Stuff My Files the exported file will be saved in C My Stuff My Files Exported Images When specifying a path this way the folders you specify do not have to be existing ones if they do not already exist they will be created automatically 9 This step applies for export in the AVI format only if using the JPEG format go to step 13 By default the AVI file will get a file name based on the export start time in the 24 hour format along the structure yyyymmdd hhmmss avi year month day hour minute second example 20050927 130603 for a file with a start time of 13 06 03 on 27th September 2005 The name will automatically appear in the AVI FileName field The default file name format is independent of regional settings on your computer You are always able to change the default file name to a name of your choice simply by overwriting the default file name 10 Click the Export button to begin the export The status bar in the upper part of the export dialog will display the status of the export Ex
116. Z Positions You are able to move to a specific position in an IPIX view and then save that position by clicking the Save button When you later want to return to the saved position click the Load button Tip You may be able to use a joystick for controlling your PTZ and IPIX cameras Joystick control is configured on NetGuard s Setup tab See Further Configuration Note Even though joystick and point and click control is supported for a large number of PTZ cameras not all PTZ cameras may be controlled this way Refer to the release note for information about joystick and point and click support for PTZ cameras You view recorded images on NetGuard s Browse tab When you select NetGuard s Browse tab NetGuard will connect to the ProSight SMB server and display recorded images from the cameras in the selected view This way you are able to browse recorded images Note Particular user rights may be required in order to access the Browse tab Depending on your user rights access to browsing images from some cameras may be restricted Date and time formats used when browsing recorded images may vary depending on your computer s regional settings Illustrations in this help topic and date and time formats used in these illustrations are thus for guidance only The Browse tab provides you with a number of advanced features for browsing recorded images In addition to image browsing features the Browse tab also lets you print images and export AVIs m
117. a at the far right of the Windows taskbar 3 Stop the Realtime Feed Server by clicking the Stop button 4 Change the port number in the Server Port field 5 Locate the file playbackfeed html in the HTML directory under the directory in which the ProSight SMB software is installed 6 Edit the file playbackfeed html by changing the port number in the line RTFeed port 9513 to the required port number OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 200 RealtimeFeed Server Administrator s Guide to Day to Day Operation Once you run the Realtime Feed Server remote users will be able to connect to it for live image feeds Starting the Realtime Feed Server The Realtime Feed Server may already be running When the Realtime Feed Server is running the Realtime Feed Server icon appears in the notification area system tray at the far right of the Windows taskbar Realtime Feed Server icon If the icon is not present you must start the Realtime Feed Server To start the Realtime Feed Server do the following 1 Open Windows Start menu 2 Select All Programs 3 Select ProSight SMB gt Realtime Feed Server The RealtimeFeed Server icon now appears in the notification area at the far right of the Windows taskbar RealtimeFeed Server icon 4 Click the Realtim
118. a limited period of time use the lower slider for more coarse browsing within longer time spans Playback Slider and Buttons The Time Navigation section s playback slider lets you specify the required playback speed In the slider s middle position playback speed is real time 1 00x Drag the slider to the left for a slower playback speed drag to the right for a faster playback speed An indication of the exact playback speed is displayed in the upper right corner of the Time Navigation section s Master Time area Use the playback buttons to play back recordings Play reverse Plays back recordings backwards in time Play forward Plays back recordings forward in time Stop Stops playback Tip Dragging the playback slider to its leftmost position pauses playback Go To Time The Time Navigation section s Go To Time fields let you quickly jump to a specific point in time Specify required date in the first field and required time in the second field then click the Go link OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 186 Sequences The Browse tab s Sequences section provides you with an overview of recorded sequences for the camera selected in the view To use the Sequences section select the required camera in the view then click the Sequences section s Get Seq
119. a or audio source OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 12 Cameras When you have selected a camera in the Administrator window s Device Manager section clicking the Settings button will open the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window in which you specify camera settings Audio sources When you have selected an audio source in the Administrator window s Device Manager section clicking the Settings button will open the Audio Device Settings window in which you can enable disable the audio source and change its name if required I O Setup Opens the I O Setup window in which you are able to define events based on input events for example when a door sensor detects that a door is opened and VMD Video Motion Detection The I O Setup window also lets you specify output e g a siren When defined events can be used for a variety of purposes For example an input event can be used for triggering output for starting a particular camera and for triggering that an e mail message is sent to a particular user notifying the user of the recorded event See also the description of the I O Control button Event Buttons Opens the Event Buttons window in which you are able to define events for use on event buttons Event
120. access to particular cameras and features in the following way 1 Click the User Access button This will open the Define Camera Access for individual users window Define Camera Access for individual users window 2 In the User list select the required user 3 In the Defined Cameras list select the name of each camera to which the user should have access Tip By pressing the CTRL or SHIFT buttons on your keyboard while selecting camera names OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 198 in the Defined Cameras list you are able to select several or all of the listed camera names in one go 4 Click the gt gt button to move the selected camera names to the Viewable by selected user list 5 If the user in question should be able to play back recordings from the selected cameras select the Allow playback functionality via Web server check box 6 If the user in question should be able to generate AVI movie clips from recordings from the selected cameras select the Allow AVI creation via Web server check box 7 Repeat as required for other users Tip For the remote user s perspective also see Remote Access through Web and RealtimeFeed Servers Testing the Web Server Configuration To test the Web Server open an Internet Explorer browser version 6 0 o
121. age 128 When a user who has been added this way logs in with a NetGuard EVS the user should not specify any server name PC name or IP address as part of the user name Example of a correctly specified user name USER001 Example of an incorrectly specified user name PC001 USER001 The user should of course still specify a password and any required server information How to Edit an Existing User Name or Password Editing an existing user s user name or password is only possible if the user in question is of the type Basic user To edit the user name or password for an existing Basic user do the following Select the required user in the Current users list and click the Change password button Edit the user name and or password as required then click OK Remember to inform the user about the change How to Remove an Existing User To remove a user from the User administration window s list of users select the user in the list and click the Delete button When removed from the list the user will no longer be able to log in What Information to Provide to Users The information you need to provide in order to enable users to effortlessly log in to the surveillance system depends on whether the users are using NetGuards or NetGuard EVSs NetGuard Users When users log in with NetGuards they will always use basic authentication Provide them with the following information User name Remember that user names are case sensitive so make it
122. al Cameras To add a camera to a view do the following In the Setup tab s Views section select the required view When you select a view the layout of the selected view is outlined in the main section of NetGuard EVS window In the Setup tab s System Overview section click the plus sign next to Cameras then the plus sign next to the required server to view a list of available cameras 1 Select the required camera from the list and drag the camera to the required position in the view When you have dragged a camera to a position in the view an image from the camera will provided a connection can be established appear in the selected position If a connection cannot be established for example if the surveillance system s recording server is not running the name of the camera will be displayed in the selected position When the camera position is selected you are able to specify its properties in the Setup tab s Properties section see Adjusting Camera Properties for detailed information 2 Repeat for each camera required in the view Tip If you want to use all of the cameras under a server you may simply drag the required server link to the view this will automatically place all of the server s cameras in the view from the selected position onwards Make sure a sufficient number of positions are available in the view Tip You can easily change which cameras are included in your view Either clear an individual camera position by c
123. all available button types including the ability to switch between our four different views The HTML for the page looks like this lt html gt lt body gt lt input type button value Change to Group1 View1 onclick top changeView Shared Group 1 View 1 gt lt br gt lt input type button value Change to Group1 View2 onclick top changeView Shared Group 1 View 2 gt lt br gt lt input type button value Change to Group2 View1 onclick top changeView Shared Group 2 View 1 gt lt br gt lt input type button value Change to Group2 View2 onclick top changeView Shared Group 2 View 2 gt lt br gt lt input type button value Live onclick top selectPane live gt lt br gt lt input type button value Browse onclick top selectPane browse gt lt br gt lt input type button value Setup onclick top selectPane setup gt lt br gt lt input type button value Show pane onclick top showPane true gt lt br gt lt input type button value Hide pane onclick top showPane false gt lt br gt lt input type button value Show top title onclick top showTopTitle true gt lt br gt lt input type button value Hide top title onclick top showTopTitle false gt lt br gt lt input type button value Set time to New Year s Eve onclick top setTime Dec 31 2005 23 59 50 gt lt br gt lt body gt lt html gt Tip You may copy the HTML and modify
124. alled as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service the following information is not relevant See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences When the recording server has been installed as the Monitor application it is possible to let some or all of the cameras connected to a ProSight SMB server run in the background i e without the cameras being included in the Monitor application itself For such background cameras the features of the Monitor application will not be immediately available although recorded images from such cameras can still be browsed in the Monitor application s Viewer However background cameras can be accessed for viewing of live and recorded images through a NetGuard or NetGuard EVS Apart from the fact that background cameras cannot be immediately accessed through the Monitor other settings such as scheduling input events output archiving the ability for cameras to be started on remote live requests see description of the General Settings window s Advanced section etc fully apply for background cameras Tip If you require Monitor access to a camera which has been running in the background you can simply include the camera in the Monitor provided not all of the Monitor s 25 possible camera positions are already in use You do this in the Monitor Manag
125. amera Name window Selecting a Color for Highlighting Detected Motion To select a color pick the required color from the Basic Colors palette and click OK The ability to define custom colors is not available Note Highlighting of detected motion in the Monitor application requires that the Show Motion check box in the Camera Monitor section of the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window is selected Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The Define Exclusion Regions window lets you disable motion detection in specific areas of a camera s images Disabling motion detection in certain areas may help you avoid detection of irrelevant motion for example if the camera covers an area where a tree is swaying in the wind or where cars regularly pass by in the background The Define Exclusion Regions window with an exclusion area highlighted in blue Access You access the Define Exclusion Regions window by clicking the Exclude Regions button in the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 32 Defining Areas in which Motion Detection Should Be Disabled The Define Exclusion Regions window features a
126. ample the PTZ camera may move to a preset position covering a door area when a door is opened Note PTZ On Event is stopped for all cameras as long as Manual Mode is used to allow cameras to be controlled manually Viewer Installation dependent features The Viewer is only available from the Monitor when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service the features described in the following will not be available from the Monitor application See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences Note that if the Monitor application is not installed on your surveillance system you may still include a standalone version of the Viewer when exporting database content from NetGuard EVS including the Viewer in the export will provide recipients for example investigators police authorities etc with a convenient tool for browsing the exported database content The Viewer lets you browse and play back recordings from cameras defined by the surveillance system administrator The Viewer also lets you print images send images via e mail and export entire video and audio sequences in a variety of formats Note Certain user rights may be required in order to use the Viewer ask your surveillance system administrator if in doubt Access You access the Viewer from the Monitor application by clicking
127. an unambiguous path can be defined for example in a folder on the user s C drive example C myfolder file htm Saving the HTML page on the user s desktop or in the user s My Documents folder will not work properly due to the way Windows constructs the path to such locations We then imported the HTML page into the required NetGuard EVS views When importing the HTML page we made sure to select Enable HTML scripting in the HTML page s Properties on the Setup tab Selecting Enable HTML scripting ensures that the scripting required for the buttons to work is automatically inserted in the HTML page OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 156 Example of an HTML Page with Image Map Navigation You may also create an HTML page with more advanced content for example an image map allowing users to switch between views In the following example we have kept the two groups and two views from the previous example Instead of using buttons we have created an HTML page with an image of a floor plan and created an image map based on the floor plan Viewed in a browser our HTML page looks like this HTML page with image map for navigating between views How you structure and create an image map is of course highly individual For this example we divided the floor plan into four c
128. ance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 39 In the Monitor preset position buttons are grouped in five preset banks A E of five buttons each 1 5 By moving a preset position up or down you can thus determine which preset bank and which button number should be used for a particular preset position In NetGuard and NetGuard EVS users select preset positions from a list By moving a preset position up or down in the Preset Positions section s list you can thus determine the sequence in which preset positions are presented in NetGuard s or NetGuard EVS s list Display of preset positions in Monitor Administrators are able to specify the sequence in which available preset positions are displayed in the various applications Preset Position on Events Section If you have specified input or VMD events or event buttons you are able to make the PTZ camera automatically go to particular preset positions when particular events occur To configure the use of preset positions on events click the Setup button This will open the Event window for preset positions on event in which you are able to associate particular preset positions with particular events To use preset positions on event select the Goto preset on event check box Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the follo
129. and T0mMy5Pa55w0rD masked by asterisks in the dialog s Password field Client exe ServerAddress http ourserver UserName Tommy Password T0mMy5Pa55w0rD AuthenticationType Simple From the user s point of view the called login dialog would look like this If we were to use Windows authentication the example would be Client exe ServerAddress http ourserver UserName Tommy Password T0mMy5Pa55w0rD AuthenticationType Windows If we were to use Windows authentication current user the UserName and Password parameters would not be necessary and the example would look like this Client exe ServerAddress http ourserver AuthenticationType WindowsDefault OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 160 Script Refers to a full path to an scs script a script type targeted at controlling NetGuard EVS The following example uses an scs script to login Client exe Script c startup scs Example of an scs script for logging in to http ourserver with the current Windows user lt ScriptEngine gt lt Login gt lt ServerAddress gt http ourserver lt ServerAddress gt lt AuthenticationType gt WindowsDefault lt AuthenticationType gt lt Login gt lt ScriptEngine gt You are able to use many of NetGuard EVS s function calls see Viewing a List of Poss
130. ant to change the name of a camera right click the camera name in question then select Edit from the menu that appears Tip Individual cameras listed in the Device Manager section are by default enabled meaning that images from the cameras are by default transferred to ProSight SMB provided that the cameras are marked as online in the Camera Alert Scheduler Window also default If required you can disable a camera listed in the Device Manager section by right clicking the name of the camera in question See more information under Administrator window Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The Edit device settings window lets you edit the settings of an already installed device The Edit device settings window OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 16 Access To access the Edit device settings window select the required device in the Administrator window s Device Manager section and click the Edit Device button The Edit device settings window is divided into two sections Identify Video Device Section The Identify Video Device section contains the following fields buttons etc Field Button Description Device Type Select required device ty
131. aracter MAC address of the device example 0123456789AF Tip ProSight SMB is able to automatically detect serial number as well as device type provided the IP address host name and password of the device have been specified in the IP address DNS Host Name and Root Password fields Simply click the Detect Device button to auto detect device type and serial number Device License Key A 16 character license key DLK for the device obtained when registering the software OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 17 Enable iPIX Enables the use of IPIX a technology that allows viewing of 360 degree panoramic images Note Use of the IPIX technology requires either a dedicated IPIX camera or a regular camera equipped with a special IPIX camera lens for which a special IPIX license key is required If the device in question is for a dedicated IPIX camera the check box is selected by default and you do not have to enter an IPIX license key in the neighboring field iPIX License Key License key for using the IPIX technology obtained when registering the software Note This information is only required if the Enable iPIX check box is selected manually Network Settings for Video Device Section The Network Settings for Video Device section contains the fol
132. ard EVS is highly flexible when it comes to customizing navigation and other features For advanced users it is possible to create approximately 100 different function calls in NetGuard EVS See NetGuard EVS Scripting for more information OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 154 Example of an HTML Page with Button Navigation A very quick solution is to create an HTML page with buttons for navigation You are able to create a wide variety of buttons on the HTML page In this example we will just create two types of buttons Buttons for switching between NetGuard EVS s views Required HTML syntax lt input type button value Buttontext onclick SCS Views SelectView Viewstatus Groupname Viewname gt Where Viewstatus indicates whether the view is shared or private if the HTML page is to be distributed to several users the view must be shared Example from a real button lt input type button value Go to Shared Group1 View2 onclick SCS Views SelectView Shared Group1 View2 gt This button would allow users to go to a view called View2 in a shared group called Group1 Buttons for switching between NetGuard EVS s three tabs Live Browse and Setup Bear in mind that depending on their user rights some users may not be able to access all three tab
133. ard begins In the wizard click Next and follow the installation instructions Installing NetGuard from CD If you wish to install NetGuard from the ProSight SMB software CD do the following 1 Insert the ProSight SMB software CD wait for a short while select required language then click the Install NetGuard link Tip Depending on your security settings you may receive one or more security warnings Do you want to run or save this file Do you want to run this software When this is the case click the Run button 2 NetGuard Setup Wizard begins In the wizard click Next and follow the installation instructions Accessing and configuring NetGuard is very straightforward Even first time users will typically be able to start and set up their NetGuard in a matter of minutes Access NetGuard may either be installed locally on the remote user s computer or it may be run from the ProSight SMB server and accessed by connecting to the server through an Internet Explorer browser See the following descriptions Accessing a NetGuard Run from Server If you want to run NetGuard straight from the ProSight SMB server open an Internet Explorer browser version 6 0 or later and connect to the URL or IP address specified by your system administrator When you connect to the ProSight SMB server you will see a welcome page OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303
134. ard or NetGuard EVS Note The use of event notifications requires that at least one event has been specified for a device on your ProSight SMB system the event does not have to be specified for the particular camera Read more about events in About Input Events amp Output Outputs The Outputs button opens the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window in which you are able to specify which outputs e g the sounding of a siren or the switching on of the lights should be associated with motion detection and or with output buttons for manually triggering output when the camera is selected in the Monitor application NetGuard and NetGuard EVS Note The use of outputs requires that at least one event has been specified for a device on your ProSight SMB system the event does not have to be specified for the particular camera You specify output events in the I O Setup window accessed by clicking the I O Setup button in the Administrator window PTZ Preset Positions PTZ cameras only Available only if the camera is a PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom camera supporting PTZ preset positions the PTZ Preset Positions button opens PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name Camera Name window in which you are able to specify preset positions for the camera Note If the Monitor application or Recording Server service is running the button will not be available To make the button available do the following If the Monitor applica
135. as displayed in the hotspot Frame Rate Lets you select a frame rate for the hotspot Select between Unlimited default Medium or Low The setting will apply for all cameras included in the hotspot The effect of your selection can be illustrated by the following table Effect Unlimited Medium Low JPEG Send all frames Send every 4th frame Send every 20th frame MPEG IFrame Send all frames Send all frames Send all frames MPEG PFrame Send all frames Do not send any frames Do not send any frames Example If you set the Frame Rate option to Low in your NetGuard EVS and your surveillance system administrator has configured a camera to feed JPEG images at a frame rate of 20 frames per second you will experience an average of 1 frame per second when viewing video from the camera in the hotspot If your administrator had configured a camera with a feed as low as 4 frames per second you would with Frame Rate set to Low in your NetGuard EVS experience an average of 0 2 frames per second when viewing video from the camera in the hotspot Maintain Image Aspect Ratio If check box is selected the cameras original image aspect ratio will be maintained this will provide you with non distorted images but may lead to black bars appearing above below images If check box is cleared images will be stretched to fit the hotspot this may lead to slightly distorted images but you will avoid any black bars appearing around the
136. ase becomes corrupted the contents of the database will be deleted Archive no repair Available only if archiving is enabled for the camera If the database becomes corrupted the contents of the database will be archived Tip An archived corrupt database can be repaired by the Viewer Open the Viewer and attempt to browse the archived recordings from the camera in question Browsing will initially fail but this will make the Viewer start repairing the corrupt database When the contents of the local database for the camera are either deleted or archived the database is reset and will be ready for storing new recordings Note No images can be recorded while the database is being repaired For large installations a repair may take several hours especially if the Repair Scan Delete if fails action involving two different repair methods is selected and the first repair method fast repair fails Note In case recordings for a camera get bigger than expected or the available drive space is suddenly reduced in another way an advanced database resizing procedure will automatically take place If archives are present on the same drive as the camera s database the oldest archive for all cameras archived on that drive will be deleted OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi
137. asic authentication You use the AuthenticationType parameter described in the following to control which authentication method to use OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 159 Password Refers to a specific password The following example would show NetGuard EVS s login dialog with http ourserver in the dialog s Server address field Tommy in the dialog s User name field and T0mMy5Pa55w0rD in the dialog s Password field Client exe ServerAddress http ourserver UserName Tommy Password T0mMy5Pa55w0rD Note The Password parameter is only relevant if using the authentication methods Windows authentication and Basic authentication You use the AuthenticationType parameter described in the following to control which authentication method to use AuthenticationType Refers to one of NetGuard EVS s three possible authentication methods Windows authentication current user called WindowsDefault in startup scripts Windows authentication called Windows in startup scripts or Basic authentication called Simple in the startup scripts The following example would show NetGuard EVS s login dialog with http ourserver in the dialog s Server address field Basic authentication selected in the dialog s Authentication field Tommy in the dialog s User name field
138. ation Help Lets you view the built in help Alternatively press your keyboard s F1 button to open the help system OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 108 Setting Up the Viewer s Camera Layout The camera layout is the area of the Viewer in which you view images The camera layout section may display images from up to 16 different cameras at a time You can configure the camera layout to suit your exact needs First specify the camera layout s grid size i e how many camera slots you want the camera layout to contain then specify which camera to use in each camera slot Selecting Grid Size To specify how many camera slots you want in the camera layout do the following 1 Click the Settings icon in the Viewer s toolbar Settings icon This will open the Settings control panel In the Settings control panel s Layout list select the required camera layout grid 1 1 2 2 3 3 or 4 4 With a 4 4 grid you will be able to display images from 16 cameras simultaneously in the camera layout Assign cameras to the camera layout s camera slots as described in the following Assigning Cameras Having specified the required grid size for the camera layout assign cameras to the camera layout s camera slots the following way Click the Database Information
139. bility to create re usable and customizable modules which makes it possible to develop highly flexible software solutions You can therefore as a rule of thumb expect Net based software to be highly flexible ready for integration of new features plugins etc However organizations and their requirements are different and some organizations find that the high degree of interconnection of services and computers inherent in a Net based solution is not desirable Instead such organizations rely on more classic Windows solutions Yes Use NetGuard EVS access through the ImageServer The Net based NetGuard EVS offers more features for remote users than the other solutions Net Framework 2 0 downloadable from http www microsoft com downloads is required on computers running NetGuard EVS No Use NetGuard access through the ImageServer NetGuard is not a Net based solution The following table outlines the main differences between the three remote access solutions Remote Access Solutions at a Glance Regular Browser Access through Web Server RealtimeFeed Server NetGuard Access through ImageServer NetGuard EVS Access through ImageServer Remote User s Installation None remote user access system through regular browser Optional client can be installed on remote user s computer or accessed from server Client must be installed on remote user s computer Net Framework 2 0 is required on computers running NetGuard
140. buttons can be used in the Monitor application and NetGuard EVS for manually triggering events I O Control Opens the I O Control window in which you are able to attach outputs to input events This way you can for example define that a siren should sound when a sensor detects that a door is opened Exit Closes the Administrator application Tip Clicking the icon in the left corner of the Administrator window s title bar gives you access to a small menu Selecting About Adm from the menu will display a dialog with your system s version number and software license code this is valuable information should you ever need to contact product support Import of DLKs Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights You must have a Device License Key DLK for every device IP network camera or IP video server installed on your ProSight SMB surveillance system Remember that you are allowed to install and use only the number of cameras listed on your organization s license sheet regardless of you number of available DLKs For example a fully used four port video server counts as four cameras even though the cameras are connected through a single device therefore a fully used four port video server will use four licenses System administrators obtain DLKs as part of the software registration process You are able to specify each DLK manually when a
141. camera layout grid e g 3 3 Note that if you want to use a hot spot see description of Monitor Manager window s Configuration section the space required for the hot spot will affect the number of camera positions will be available in the camera layout grid For example a 3 3 grid will normally contain nine camera positions with a 2 2 hot spot however only five camera positions will be available 2 Select a position in the Monitor Manager window s camera layout grid The selected position will be indicated in light gray whereas non selected positions will be dark gray 3 Select the required camera from the Select Camera list An image from the selected camera will be displayed in the selected camera layout grid position If an image from the camera is not yet available a camera icon will appear Note that a disabled camera cannot be selected for more information about disabling enabling cameras see the description of the Administrator window 4 Repeat step 2 3 for other required cameras Tip You are always able to change the camera selection for a position in the layout grid Simply select the required position when a position already contains a camera image it will be highlighted with a yellow border when you select it then select a different camera from the Select Camera list Recording Server Service Management Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may re
142. camera required in the view Tip If you want to use all of the cameras under a server you may simply drag the required server to the view this will automatically place all of the server s cameras in the view beginning at the selected position Remember to have sufficient positions available in the view Tip You can always change the cameras in the view Either drag the System Overview section s Clear link to a position in the view to clear the position or simply overwrite a position by dragging a different camera to the position 4 NetGuard users on your surveillance system will now able to access the view in the shared group as from their next login Tip In addition to cameras you are able to add static images and HTML pages to views See Further Configuration Using Your Views on Different Computers Your user settings including your private views are stored on the ProSight SMB server This means that you are able to use your private views on any computer that has a NetGuard installed provided you log in to NetGuard with your own user name and password Note From time to time your system administrator may make changes to camera or user properties on the ProSight SMB server When this is the case such changes will take effect in NetGuard the first time you log in after the changes were made Such changes may occasionally require you to re create your views Ask your system administrator if in doubt In addition to creation of groups a
143. ce Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 204 which motion has been detected Alarms browsing is based on a list of the sequences Clicking the left arrow lets you browse back in time in a list of sequences in which motion was detected The list displays information about start time first motion detection alarm time and end time for each sequence By clicking the list s links you are able to jump to the images matching each sequence s start time first motion detection alarm time and end time Example of Alarmslist Likewise clicking the right arrow lets you browse forward in time in a list of sequences in which motion was detected The list displays information about start time first motion detection alarm time and end time for each sequence By clicking the list s links you are able to jump to the images matching each sequence s start time first motion detection alarm time and end time Clicking the Overview link lets you quickly jump to a list of the newest sequences in which motion was detected Live Switches to live view for the selected camera Live view lets you view live images from the selected camera When viewing live images you are able to select between low medium and high image quality The pause button start buttons in the live view lets you pause and start the live feed as required If configured for the se
144. changes in individual pixels which should not be regarded as motion in the image and automatically mark such areas as areas in which motion detection should be disabled As the automatic detection is based on an analysis of a number of images it may take a few seconds from you click the Auto button to noisy areas are detected and marked as areas in which motion detection should be disabled Note The automatic detection of noisy areas happens according to the noise sensitivity setting specified in the Adjust Motion Detection window In order for the automatic detection of noisy areas to work as intended it is recommended that you specify a noise sensitivity setting that matches your requirements before you make use of the automatic detection feature Show Grid With the Show grid check box selected default the preview image contains a grid indicating the division of the preview image into selectable sections With the Show grid check box cleared the grid in the preview image is removed This may provide a less obscured view of the preview image Selection of areas in which motion detection should be disabled takes place the same way as when the grid is visible Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The Select Color window lets you select between three colors to be used for highlighting areas with disabled motion detection when images from the came
145. clear to the users if any parts of their user names should specifically be upper or lower case Password Users should enter their passwords exactly as you have specified them on the Image Server Address IP address or hostname of the Image Server Port Port to use when accessing the Image Server e g 80 NetGuard EVS Users When users log in with NetGuard EVSs they must select between using basic or Windows based authentication Provide them with the following information Server Address IP address or hostname of the Image Server plus any port number required In NetGuard EVS s login dialog users will enter this information in a single field called Server Address so if the IP address is 123 123 123 123 and the port number is 80 tell users that the Server Address is 123 123 123 123 80 Authentication In NetGuard EVS s login dialog users will be asked to select between basic authentication or Windows based authentication Windows based authentication may in turn be based on the currently logged in Windows user OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 129 If using basic user name and password authentication tell users that the required authentication is Basic authentication If using Windows based authentication based on the currently logged in Windows user tell user
146. contains one or more top level folders for accessing shared views does not in itself guarantee that shared views are actually available To verify if any shared views are available under the top level folders expand the folders Tip You can use your views private as well as shared on any computer that has a NetGuard EVS installed This is because information about your views is stored centrally on the surveillance system server as part of your user login information Depending on your user rights you may be able to create and edit the following types of views Private and shared Private but not shared Shared but not private OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 137 Neither private nor shared in which case you simply rely on shared views created by others Typically only a few people in an organization are able to create and edit shared views For example the surveillance system administrator may create and maintain a number of shared views When relevant NetGuard EVS users log in the shared views will automatically be available to them and they will basically not need to create further views unless they want their own private views Checking which Views You are Able to Create and Edit To quickly determine which of the Views section s top level folders your user
147. cted i e when images received from the camera should be stored in the database on certain conditions only Select check box to store all images in which motion is detected On event Note Use of storage on event requires that events have been defined Read more about events in About Input Events amp Output Available only when the option Conditionally is selected i e when images received from the camera should be stored in the database on certain conditions only Select check box to store all images regardless of motion when an external event occurs and until another external event occurs then select required start and stop events in the Start and Stop lists Number of seconds pre post recordings on event Available only when the option Conditionally is selected i e when images received from the camera should be stored in the database on certain conditions only You are able to store recordings from periods preceding and following detected motion and or specified events Using such a pre post buffer can be advantageous If for example you have defined that images should be stored when a door is opened being able to see what happened immediately prior to the door being opened may be important Specify the number of seconds for which you want to store images from before and after the storage conditions are met Example You have specified that images should be stored conditionally on event with a start event called Do
148. cting the Include Audio check box if no audio sources are attached the check box will not be available 5 If you want to compress the exported database select the Compress Exported Database check box Compression can reduce the size of the exported database by approximately 10 However the database export process will take considerably longer when compression is used 6 If you want to encrypt the exported database select the Encrypt Exported Database check box If you select encryption specify a password for subsequent decryption of the exported databases and remember to send the password to the recipient separately Note that when encryption is used the database export process as well as subsequent opening of the database in order to view its content will take considerably longer than when no encryption is used 7 Specify export destination in the export dialog s Export Destination section Desktop If you select Desktop your exported file will be saved in an automatically created Exported Images folder on the desktop of your PC Path If you select Path you are able to specify a path yourself The exported database will be saved in an automatically created Exported Images folder under the path you specify example If you specify a path like C My Stuff My Files the exported file will be saved in C My Stuff My Files Exported Images When specifying a path this way the folders you specify do not have to be existing ones if th
149. cting the Use preset positions from device feature Set Position Associates the preset position selected in the list with the position specified in the PTZ View section If the preset position selected in the list is yet undefined you will be asked to specify a name for the preset position Tip Since the name will appear on buttons in the Monitor application specify a name that is short enough to appear on a button If the name is too long it will be truncated when used on the button in the Monitor NetGuard NetGuard EVS is capable of displaying even long preset position names Edit Name Lets you edit a preset position name selected in the list Only works for an already defined preset position name Test Lets you test a defined preset position Select the required preset position in the list then click the Test button The effect is displayed instantly in the PTZ View section Delete Lets you delete a preset position selected in the list When a preset position name is deleted it will appear as undefined in the list Move up Move down Lets you move a preset position selected in the list up and down respectively The selected preset position is moved one step per click By moving preset position up or down you are able to control the sequence in which available preset positions are presented in the Monitor application and in NetGuard and NetGuard EVS OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveill
150. ctions simultaneously Several types of events exist see About Input Events amp Output In most cases events occur and actions are triggered without the need for human intervention by ProSight SMB users System administrators define the criteria for each event for example a certain amount of detected motion or input from a specific sensor when the criteria are met the system interprets it as an event and automatically triggers the required actions However you may also want users to be able to manually force an event to occur For this purpose ProSight SMB lets you define event buttons Event buttons let users manually trigger events from the Monitor application and NetGuard EVS In NetGuard EVS event buttons are actually not buttons instead users manually trigger events by selecting them from a list See also About Event Buttons for examples of the many ways in which you can use event buttons To add an event button do the following 1 In the Administrator window click the Event Buttons button This will open the Event Buttons window 2 In the Event Buttons window first select the camera or other device for which you want the event button to be available then click the Add new event button Note that you are also able to make the event button globally available i e available to users regardless of which camera device they have selected in the Monitor or NetGuard EVS To make the event button globally available simply select
151. d EVS and NetGuard video clients For NetGuard and NetGuard EVS video client system requirements visit the OnSSI website http www onssi com products nvrs_recommended php OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 7 Administrator Application For users without administrator rights access to certain features in ProSight SMB may in some organizations have been restricted When this is the case you will be asked to specify the administrator password in the Administrator Login window in order to get access to the restricted features The Administrator Login window You will only be asked to specify the administrator password in three situations When you open the Administrator application by selecting it from Windows Start menu or by clicking the Administrator shortcut on the desktop This will only be the case when access to the Administrator application has been password protected When you click the Admin Login button to access the Administrator from the Monitor application When access to particular features such as control of PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras in the Monitor application has been restricted to administrators only Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator ri
152. d groups are available in your organization NetGuard s Setup tab lets you create groups and views and specify which cameras should be included in each view Are Any Views in Shared Groups Available Especially if you are a first time user of NetGuard you will want to know whether any views have already been created and placed in shared groups for your organization s NetGuard users Typically your surveillance system administrator will have told you if shared groups are used in your organization OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 173 Alternatively to quickly determine whether any views have already been created and placed in shared groups do the following Note This method requires that your user rights permit you to access NetGuard s Live tab and or Browse tab Most users will have access to at least one of these tabs 1 Go to NetGuard s Live or Browse tab 2 On the Live or Browse tab look at the Views section If the Views section contains any expandable folders labeled Shared shared groups are available and you may your user rights permitting begin using the views in the shared groups for viewing live and recorded images See Viewing Live Images and Viewing Recorded Images Only if you want to add more views e g customize your NetGuard
153. d or NetGuard EVS images can also be provided through the ProSight SMB surveillance system s built in Web Server and Realtime Feed Server When this is the case remote users connect to the Web Server and the Realtime Feed Server through a regular browser no client software is required The Web Server and the Realtime Feed Server do by no means offer as advanced functionality as the Image Server NetGuard NetGuard EVS neither at the server end nor at the client end However if remote users are to access the surveillance system through very slow connections such as 28 8 Kbps connections using the Web Server and the Realtime Feed Server may be advisable For a remote user perspective of regular browser access through the Web Server and Realtime Feed Server see Remote Access through Web and Realtime Feed Servers Your organization s choice of remote access solution will depend on the organization s requirements Deciding Which Remote Access Solution to Use When deciding which remote access solution is the best choice for your organization system administrators may find it helpful to review the following Note Systems and requirements differ from organization to organization The following questions and answers are thus for guidance only Has your surveillance system s recording server been installed as a service rather than as the Monitor application Yes Use NetGuard EVS access through the ImageServer NetGuard EVS offers functionality otherwis
154. dding a device through the Device Setup Wizard available by clicking the Add Device button in the Administrator window However you can avoid having to specify each DLK manually by using the following procedure to import all received DLKs into ProSight SMB in one go OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 13 Prerequisites The DLKs received in a dlk file must have been saved at a location accessible by the surveillance server for example on a network drive or on a USB stick 1 Open the Administrator window 2 In the Administrator window click the Import DLKs button 3 Browse to the location at which you have saved the received dlk file Select the file and click Open All DLKs are now automatically imported and the relevant DLK will automatically appear when you add a device through the Device Setup Wizard Device Administration Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights In ProSight SMB you add devices IP video camera devices or IP video server devices rather than actual cameras This is because devices have their own IP addresses or host names Being IP based ProSight SMB primarily identifies units on the surveillance system based on their IP addresses or hos
155. default authentication method i e the method which is automatically used unless you select another method Windows authentication with which you will be authenticated through your Windows login but you will need to type your Windows user name and password Basic authentication which can only be used when connection to selected surveillance systems User name Only required if the authentication method Windows authentication or Basic authentication is selected If using Windows authentication type your Windows user name The user name is case sensitive i e there is a difference between typing for example amanda and Amanda Password Only required if the authentication method Windows authentication or Basic authentication is selected If using Windows authentication type your Windows password Remember password When using Windows authentication or Basic authentication you have the option of selecting Remember password in which case you can simply click Connect the next time you want to log in Note Depending on your type of organization and work environment security restrictions may apply Consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt about whether it is safe to use this feature Auto login If selected you will automatically be logged in to NetGuard EVS when you log in to Windows If using Windows authentication the Remember password check box must be selected in order for the auto login feature to be available Note
156. device has its own motion detection capabilities on input events Once such VMD or input events have been added they can be tied to output through the I O Control window Note In the following it is assumed that the required output unit has been connected to the output port on the required camera or other device but that it has not yet been defined on your ProSight SMB system If you have already defined the output on your system begin at step 5 1 In the Administrator window click the I O Setup button This will open the I O Setup window 2 In the I O Setup window first select the camera or other device to which the output unit is connected then click the Add new output event button This will open the Add New Output window 3 In the Add New Output window the External output connected to field will show the name of the selected camera or other device Now specify information in the following fields OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 90 Output connected on Select the camera device output port on which the output unit is connected Many cameras devices only have a single output port in that case simply select Output 1 Keep output for Specify the amount of time for which the output should be active when triggered in either 1 10 seconds or s
157. dow Lets you select the required hot spot functionality With the hot spot Monitor users are able to select a camera in the Monitor s camera layout grid and view enlarged images from the camera The hot spot may also be used for point and click operations on some PTZ cameras Select between three hot spot options None No hot spot default Hot Spot Select required size for the hot spot In separate window Hot spot is a separate floating window When a hot spot is enabled it will appear as a dark gray field in the camera layout grid unless you have selected the In separate window option Configuration A 3 3 grid with a 2 2 hot spot defined in the Administrator s Monitor Manager window Carousel Note Use of the carousel feature requires that a hot spot is enabled With the carousel feature you can make the hot spot automatically change between cameras in the Monitor s camera layout grid You specify the required interval between changes in the Seconds between shifts field OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 46 How to Specify which Cameras Should Display Images in the Monitor To specify which cameras should display images in the Monitor application do the following 1 In the Monitor Manager window select a grid size for the
158. dow If requiring an image recorded at the time of the event to be included in the e mail alert also check the Include image from camera check box and select the required camera in the list next to the check box When ready click OK This will return you to the Event buttons window 4 In the Event Buttons window your newly defined event button is now listed you may have to click the expand icon in front of the name of camera or other device to see the listing Click OK to close the Event Buttons window and return to the Administrator window The defined event button will now be available in the Monitor and NetGuard EVS as described in the beginning of this text Note that individual users rights may prevent them from accessing specific cameras and or events in the NetGuard EVS such rights are defined through the ImageServer Administrator window For system administrators defining actions to be triggered by events the event button will now be selectable in line with other events defined on ProSight SMB OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 83 Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights Events can be used for automatically triggering actions in ProSight SMB such as starting
159. duce the bandwidth usage for all cameras in the view by reducing the image quality for a single camera then clicking the Apply To All button Frame Rate Lets you select a frame rate for the selected camera Default is Unlimited IPIX Split Mode Available only if the selected camera is an IPIX camera IPIX is a technology that allows creation and viewing of 360 degree panoramic images NetGuard supports up to four different viewpoints from a single IPIX camera The IPIX Split Mode list lets you select the required spilt mode One by One lets you view a single viewpoint Two by Two lets you view four different viewpoints at a time When viewed on the Live and Browse tabs the IPIX camera will appear as specified with either one or four viewpoints from the same image Tip When viewing different viewpoints from an IPIX camera on the Live or Browse tabs you are able to navigate each viewpoint independently by clicking inside each viewpoint or by using the buttons in the PTZ Control section Apply to All The Apply To All button lets you quickly apply the camera settings for the selected camera to all cameras in the view OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 180 Configuring Joystick Control The Setup tab s Joystick Control section lets you configure jo
160. e Accessing the Administrator application from the Monitor may require certain user rights See the description of the Admin Login button When you close the Administrator application and return to the Monitor the Monitor will be restarted Certain settings notably settings for PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras are not configurable when the Administrator application is accessed from the Monitor application To configure such settings you must close the Monitor application and open the Administrator application separately Exit Exits the Monitor closing down the application and thereby stopping the transfer of images from cameras to ProSight SMB You will be asked to confirm that you want to close down the application Note Use with caution Exiting the Monitor will stop recordings Certain user rights may be required in order to be able to close down the Monitor See the description of the Admin Login button Monitoring Audio OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 103 If the camera selected in the Monitor s camera layout is recording audio you are able to listen to live audio through speakers attached to the computer running ProSight SMB If using a multi port video server device audio will always be attached to the first video input on the device To mute live aud
161. e window from the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window by clicking the Outputs button Associating Outputs with Manual Control and Detected Motion Note Use of features in the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window requires that output has been defined in the I O Setup window You have a high degree of flexibility when associating a camera with particular outputs You are able to select between all available outputs i e outputs defined as output events for the camera itself as well as outputs defined as output events for other devices on the ProSight SMB system The same output may be used for manual control through an output button as well as for automatic triggering when motion is detected Selecting Output for Manual Control You are able to specify outputs to be triggered manually through output buttons in the Monitor application or from a list in NetGuard or NetGuard EVS Output buttons will become available in the Monitor when the camera is selected and the Monitor s Output button is clicked In NetGuard and NetGuard EVS users will be able to trigger outputs by selecting them from a list To specify an output for manual triggering in the Monitor or NetGuard NetGuard EVS do the following 1 Select the required output in the All Outputs list in the left side of the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Syst
162. e 146 the need for scrolling With a low scaling value e g 320 200 text on the HTML page will appear relatively large and a relatively small amount of content can be displayed without the need for scrolling Examples of the same HTML page viewed with different scaling values Enable HTML scripting Select only if the HTML page is a custom made HTML page to be used for navigating or triggering features inside NetGuard EVS itself see examples of such custom made HTML pages in Using an HTML Page for NetGuard EVS Navigation If selected a client script required for navigating and controlling a number of features inside NetGuard EVS will be added to the HTML page For HTML pages which are not going to be used for such purposes the client script cannot be used and may even cause the HTML page to malfunction Navigating the HTML Page The HTML page can be navigated using the links on the HTML page itself Furthermore each HTML page in a view will feature four navigation buttons in the top bar From left to right the buttons are Back Forward Refresh and Home Further Configuration In the Setup tab s Properties section you are able to adjust a number of settings for individual cameras To adjust a camera s properties select the required camera in the view the selected position will be indicated by a bold border then make the adjustments in the Properties section Note Particular user rights may be required in order to access the Setu
163. e Feed Server icon This will open the ProSight SMB Realtime Feed Server window If the Autostart check box is selected the Realtime Feed Server will automatically start If the Autostart check box is not selected the Realtime Feed Server must be started manually by clicking the Start button 5 Connecting users IP addresses and progress can be viewed in the ProSight SMB Realtime Feed Server window s Connections section Stopping the Realtime Feed Server To stop the Realtime Feed Server click the ProSight SMB Realtime Feed Server window s Stop button This will stop the Realtime Feed Server without shutting it down This means that you will quickly be able to start the Realtime Feed Server again by clicking the Start button Shutting Down the Realtime Feed Server To shut down the Realtime Feed Server click the ProSight SMB Realtime Feed Server window s Shut down button This will shut down the Realtime Feed Server and you will have to access it from Window s Start menu in order to start it again When clicking the Shut down button you will be asked to confirm that you want to shut down the Realtime Feed Server Installation dependent features Available only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service the Web Server and the Realtime Feed Server are not available See Installing the Software for more inf
164. e Smooth Images check box To display images from the selected camera in the resolution they were recorded in select the Scale 1 1 check box If images are larger than the resolution available in the camera layout s camera slot they will be reduced in size to fit the camera slot The correct aspect ratio will be maintained when reducing size this way Printing Sending and Exporting Evidence With the Viewer you have several options for generating video and audio evidence You are able to Print evidence Send evidence via e mail Export entire video and audio sequences in different formats OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 114 Viewer How to Installation dependent features The Viewer is only available from the Monitor when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service the features described in the following will not be available from the Monitor application See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences Note that if the Monitor application is not installed on your surveillance system you may still include a standalone version of the Viewer when exporting database content from
165. e different on your computer 5 This step applies for export in the AVI format only if using the JPEG format go to step 9 Select required frame rate for the export With the Full option all images between the start and end times will be included in the export with the Half option only every second image will be included yet still play back in real time 6 If you used digital zoom on the camera s images before exporting you are able to export the digitally zoomed images rather than the regular images Select Yes if you want to export the digitally zoomed images select No if you want to export the camera s regular non zoomed images If you did not use digital zoom before exporting this option will not be available 7 This step applies for export in the AVI format only if using the JPEG format go to step 11 In the AVI Codec list select required AVI codec The list will contain the video codecs available on your PC Tip A video codec is a particular compression decompression technology used when generating video files Your choice of codec will affect the quality and size of the AVI file The Indeo video 5 10 codec if available on your PC OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 162 generally provides a very good compromise between quality and file size 8
166. e in the Camera Settings for Device Name window may be limited if cameras are not PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras or connected to a video server device OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 18 The Camera Settings for Device Name window lets you specify certain information about a device s cameras This is primarily interesting for PTZ cameras and cameras attached to a video server device The Camera Settings for Device Name window Access You access the Camera Settings for Device Name window by clicking the Camera Settings button in the Edit device settings window The Camera Settings for Device Name window is divided into a P T Z Camera Selection section and a camera list P T Z Camera Selection Section The P T Z Camera selection section contains the following fields Field Description Some of the connected cameras are Pan Tilt Zoom cameras Select check box if any of the cameras attached to the video server device is a PTZ camera If the check box is not available PTZ is not supported for the device in question P T Z type controlled through COM1 Field available only if Some of the connected cameras are Pan Tilt Zoom cameras check box is selected If a PTZ camera is controlled through the COM1 port on the video server device select the
167. e internet The default port number is 80 You are able to change the default port number Local IP Ranges Opens the Define local IP ranges window in which you are able to define IP address ranges which the Image Server should recognize as coming from a local OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 124 network Background When a NetGuard or NetGuard EVS connects to a surveillance system an amount of initial data communication including the exchange of contact IP addresses goes on in the background completely automatically and transparent to users However when a NetGuard or NetGuard EVS on a local network connects to a surveillance system which is also on the local network the Image Server may if different subnets are involved not recognize NetGuard s or NetGuard EVS s IP address as being local When this is the case the Image Server may not return a suitable IP address to NetGuard or NetGuard EVS for further communication between the two Therefore you are able to define a list of IP ranges which the Image Server should recognize as coming from a local network in which case it will respond with a suitable IP address and seamless communication will be possible Max number of clients Only a single NetGuard or NetGuard EVS at a time is able to connect to
168. e only available through the Monitor application No Determine your needs based on the questions and answers provided in the following Will remote users access the surveillance system over very slow connections such as 28 8 Kbps connections Yes Use regular browser access through the Web Server RealtimeFeed Server No Use NetGuard or NetGuard EVS access through the ImageServer Is it acceptable to install client software on remote users computers Yes Use NetGuard or NetGuard EVS access through the ImageServer No Use NetGuard access through the ImageServer as remote users can run NetGuard straight from the ProSight SMB server as an alternative to the client being installed on remote users computers Remote access can also be provided through the Web Server RealtimeFeed Server as this does not require any client software but this is only recommended for remote access through very slow connections Will you require a large amount of future flexibility from your remote access solution Yes Use NetGuard EVS access through the ImageServer Due to the way the software has been developed NetGuard EVS offers a high degree of flexibility for integration of new features plugins etc No Use NetGuard access through the ImageServer Do you require a very feature rich client application OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845
169. e right Moves the PTZ camera to the left Moves the PTZ camera to its home position Moves the PTZ camera to the right Moves the PTZ camera down and to the left Moves the PTZ camera down Moves the PTZ camera down and to the right Zoom out one zoom level per click Zoom in one zoom level per click OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 38 Preset Positions Section Having specified a camera position in the PTZ View section you define the required position as a preset in the Preset Positions section Button Check Box Description Use preset positions from device Available only for cameras supporting this feature Check box to use preset positions defined on the camera or video server device Using preset positions from the camera or video server device will clear any preset positions you have defined for the PTZ camera you will therefore be asked to confirm your selection Note In order for preset positions from the camera or video server device to work with ProSight SMB the names of the preset positions must contain only the characters A Z a z and 0 9 and must not contain spaces If preset position names on the camera or video server device contain other characters or spaces change the preset position names on the device before sele
170. e stored centrally on the surveillance system server OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 141 This means that you are able to use your views private as well as shared on any computer that has a NetGuard EVS installed provided you log in to NetGuard EVS with your own user name and password Tip For information about adding content cameras etc to views see How to Add Content to Views Note From time to time your surveillance system administrator may make changes to camera or user properties on the surveillance system When this is the case such changes will take effect in NetGuard EVS the first time you log in after the changes were made Such changes may occasionally require you to re create your views Ask your system administrator if in doubt Once you have created views in NetGuard EVS you are able to add content to the views Note Your ability to edit views including adding content to the views depends on your user rights Basically if you are able to create the view you are also able to edit it Content can be video from individual cameras carousels for viewing images from alternating cameras in a single view position a hotspot for viewing selected camera images in high quality static images such as gif jpeg etc or HTML pages Adding Individu
171. e to the required folder Days to Keep A new event log file is created every day Event log files older than the number of days specified in the Days to keep field are automatically deleted By default event log files will be stored for five days To specify another number of days simply overwrite the value in the Days to keep field The current day s activity is always logged even with a value of 0 in the Days to keep field The maximum number of days to log is 9999 Tip Read more about ProSight SMB logging in About Logging OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 54 Advanced The Advanced section lets you specify a number of additional settings Check Box Description Disable Screen Update Installation dependent feature Available only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service this feature is not relevant See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences Turns off screen update in the Monitor application If selected all camera images displayed in the Monitor application will remain static with the note Screen Update OFF displayed across the image from each camera This will fre
172. e up system resources resulting in improved system performance but will prevent users from viewing any live images through the Monitor application Select this option if the Monitor application is not used on a daily basis e g if the Monitor application is only used when the system administrator adjusts the software configuration Keyframe only decoding Installation dependent feature Available only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service this feature is not relevant See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences With the MPEG standard keyframes stored at specified intervals record the entire view of the camera whereas the following frames record only pixels that change If selected only MPEG keyframes will be decoded and displayed in the Monitor application Note that all frames from the MPEG stream will be stored in the camera database regardless of whether keyframe only decoding is selected or not Disable Online Indicator Installation dependent feature Available only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service this feature is not relevant See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences
173. econds Note Some devices are only able to apply outputs for a relatively short time for example max five seconds Refer to the documentation for the device in question for exact information External output name Specify a name for the output The name will appear on the button list with which users will be able to manually trigger the output Note that output names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp In the following example we have specified that a siren connected on a camera s Output 1 port should sound for five seconds when triggered Tip You are able to test the output by clicking the Test Output button When ready click OK This will return you to the I O Setup window 4 In the I O Setup window your newly defined output is now listed you may have to click the expand icon in front of the name of the camera or other device to see the listing Click OK to close the I O setup window and return to the Administrator window 5 In the Administrator window first select the camera for which the output should be available then click the Settings button This will open the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window 6 In the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window click the Outputs button OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 36
174. ect About Internet Explorer in your browser s Help menu 2 In the browser s Address field type http followed by the IP address or hostname of the ProSight SMB server you want to connect to You must specify the server s port number after the IP address Use a colon to separate the IP address and the port number Example If the IP address of the server is 123 123 123 123 and its port number is 81 type http 123 123 123 123 81 3 Click the browser s Go button or simply press the ENTER key on your keyboard to go to the IP address you have specified When the connection to the Web Server has been successfully established a login page will appear 4 Access to the Web Server is likely to be restricted When this is the case specify your user name and password 5 If you want to be able to view live images or to be able to browse recorded images select the ActiveX support check box 6 Click the Login button 7 A web page with a menu for selecting cameras navigating images etc will appear Example of remote viewing of images from a surveillance camera OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 202 The menu is divide into three sections Single View light yellow background Quad View purple background and Help green background The features available i
175. ed Upon completion you are able to view and distribute the exported file Example AVI file viewed in the Winamp player other common players include the Windows Media Player and the RealPlayer You are able to use the following keyboard shortcuts in NetGuard On All Tabs CTRL 1 Go to Live tab CTRL 2 Go to Browse tab CTRL 3 Go to Setup tab CTRL DOWN ARROW Go to the next view in the Views list located in the upper part of the window CTRL UP ARROW Go to the previous view in the Views list located in the upper part of the window On Live Tab Only PLUS SIGN PTZ camera zoom in MINUS SIGN PTZ camera zoom out UP ARROW PTZ camera move up DOWN ARROW PTZ camera move down LEFT ARROW PTZ camera move left RIGHT ARROW PTZ camera move right HOME numeric keypad only PTZ camera move up and left OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 190 END numeric keypad only PTZ camera move down and left PAGE UP numeric keypad only PTZ camera move up and right PAGE DOWN numeric keypad only PTZ camera move down and right 5 numeric keypad only PTZ camera move to default position On Browse Tab Only RIGHT ARROW Move to next image LEFT ARROW Move to previous image PAGE DOWN Move to next sequence PAGE UP
176. ed in the top of each camera slot The image bar is blue When you select a particular camera in the camera layout the image bar of the selected camera image becomes a lighter blue Camera slot enlarged detail shows image bar The image bar displays the name of the camera as well as the name of the device to which the camera is connected The device name is displayed first in square brackets followed by the camera name Each image bar also features two colored indicators Motion indicator the left indicator red Lights up during periods of motion Online indicator the right indicator green Lights up during periods with recordings Storing and Recalling Views You are able to save particular configurations of the camera layout as so called views and switch between them using the Views menu in the Viewer s menu bar For example you may store one view displaying images from 16 cameras and another view displaying images from eight other cameras See How to Store and Recall Views Browsing Recordings with the Time amp Date Selector Using the time amp date selector it is possible to jump straight to recordings from a specific point in time Time amp date selector Simply select the required date in the date field and the required time in the time field Tip You are able to overwrite the fields date and time values Having used the data amp time selector to jump to recordings from a specific point in time you a
177. eld and the time in the second field Tip Instead of manually specifying date and time you may use the Browse tab s Time Navigation features to move to the required start point then click the upper of the Export section s Set buttons This will automatically set the date and time of the viewed image in the Start Time fields In the End Time fields specify end date and time for the export You may use the Set button as described above Select the required source from the Source list You may select an individual camera in which case only images from the selected camera will be included in the export or Current View Sources in which case the export will include images from all cameras in the current view for which you have database export rights Tip To quickly select an individual camera you may also simply click the required camera slot in the view Click the Database Export button This will open a separate export dialog OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 164 Export dialog Date and time format may be different on your computer The export dialog will list the specified start time end time and source 4 If the surveillance system supports audio and the selected camera s have audio sources attached you are able to include audio in the export by sele
178. elds in which case the user merely has to enter a password in order to log in If using the authentication method Windows authentication current user you can make NetGuard EVS connect to the surveillance system automatically based on the user s current Windows login Note Some authentication methods are only available if NetGuard EVS user logs in to certain surveillance systems Parameters You are able to use the following parameters ServerAddress Refers to the URL of the server to which NetGuard EVS should connect the URL of the Image Server The following example would show NetGuard EVS s login dialog with http ourserver in the dialog s Server address field Client exe ServerAddress http ourserver Keep in mind that NetGuard EVS s default authentication type is Windows authentication current user Unless you change this through using the AutheticationType parameter described in the following the login dialog will look like this from the user s point of view i e automatically displaying the name of the current Windows user in the User name field UserName Refers to a specific user name The following example would show NetGuard EVS s login dialog with http ourserver in the dialog s Server address field and Tommy in the dialog s User name field Client exe ServerAddress http ourserver UserName Tommy Note The UserName parameter is relevant only for the authentication methods Windows authentication and B
179. ems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 34 Tip When you select an output in the All Outputs list you can view detailed information about the selected output under Output Information in the lower part of the window 2 Click the gt gt button located between the All Outputs list and the On Manual Control list This will copy the selected output to the On Manual Control list Note An unlimited number of outputs may be selected this way but only the top eight outputs in the list will be available as output buttons in the Monitor In NetGuard and NetGuard EVS there are no limitations to the number of available outputs You are able to determine each output s position among the Monitor s output buttons or NetGuard s and NetGuard EVS s output list by moving the selected output up or down in the On Manual Control list with the up and down buttons located to the right of the list The selected output is moved up one step each time you click the up button Likewise each time you click the down button the selected output is moved down one step To remove an output from the On Manual Control list simply select the required output and click the lt lt button located between the All Outputs list and the On Manual Control list Selecting Output for Use on Motion Detection You are able to select outputs to be triggered automatically when motio
180. encrypted part of the log line in question was not present Inconsistency found in log file name near line The log line does not match the encrypted part Inconsistency found in log file name at beginning of log file The log file header is not correct This situation is most likely to occur if a user has attempted to delete the beginning of a log file OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 209 Removal To remove NetGuard EVS do the following Note If you are not a surveillance system administrator it is highly recommended that you consult your surveillance system administrator before removing any surveillance system related software 1 In Windows Start menu select Control Panel and select Add or Remove Programs This will open the Add or Remove Programs window 2 In the Add or Remove Programs window s list of currently installed programs select NetGuard EVS x x where x x refers to the version number 3 Click the Remove button and follow the removal instructions Bear in mind that NetGuard can be used straight from the surveillance system server without any installation required on your computer Removal of NetGuard is only relevant if NetGuard was downloaded and installed on your computer Tip To check whether you have a local
181. er window The use of background cameras may be relevant in a number of scenarios entirely depending on your needs One Possible Scenario Avoiding Using Resources on Displaying Cameras Images in Monitor Some organizations use background cameras simply to avoid using resources on displaying images from some or all cameras in the Monitor application Another Possible Scenario Hiding Cameras Images from Prying Eyes In some organizations the computer running the Monitor application may be situated in busy control rooms or reception areas where lots of people walk in and out Such organizations may use background cameras to avoid displaying images from some or all cameras in the Monitor application When this is the case the background cameras can be accessed by relevant users through a NetGuard or NetGuard EVS since access to these clients can be flexibly restricted through the ImageServer Administrator window Important Guidelines for Using Background Cameras Since background cameras are not displayed in the Monitor application it may occasionally be difficult to determine how many cameras are running Therefore when using background cameras always bear in mind that a maximum of 25 cameras at a time can be running on server regardless of whether they are running in the Monitor application or running through remote activation of background cameras For background cameras to work t
182. era it is highly recommended that you have configured the camera s image quality settings such as resolution compression etc in the Configure Device window and that you have specified any areas to be excluded from motion detection for example if the camera covers an area where a tree is swaying in the wind or where cars regularly pass by in the background in the Define Exclusion Regions window If you later change image quality settings and or exclusion area settings you should always test motion detection sensitivity settings afterwards The Adjust Motion Detection window features two sliders one for setting Noise Sensitivity and one for setting Motion Sensitivity Noise Sensitivity The Noise Sensitivity slider determines how much each pixel must change before it is regarded as motion Insignificant changes which should not be regarded as motion are considered acceptable noise hence the name of the slider With a high noise sensitivity very little change in a pixel is required before it is regarded as motion Areas in which motion is detected are highlighted in the preview image Select a slider position in which only detections you consider motion are highlighted As an alternative to using the slider you may specify a value between 0 and 256 in the field next to the slider to control the noise sensitivity setting Tip If you find the concept of noise sensitivity difficult to grasp try dragging the slider to the left towards the Hi
183. ern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 81 Optional If requiring an e mail alert to be sent automatically when the event occurs select the Send e mail if this event occurs check box Note that in order to be able to use e mail alerts the e mail alert feature must have been set up in the E Mail setup window If requiring an image recorded at the time of the event to be included in the e mail alert also check the Include image from camera check box and select the required camera in the list next to the check box When ready click OK This will return you to the I O Setup window 4 In the I O Setup window your newly defined event is now listed you may have to click the expand icon in front of the name of the camera or other device to see the listing Click OK to close the I O setup window and return to the Administrator window For system administrators defining actions to be triggered by events the event will now be selectable in line with other events defined on ProSight SMB Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights Events can be used for automatically triggering actions in ProSight SMB such as starting or stopping recording on cameras triggering e mail notifications making PTZ cameras move to specific preset positions activating output etc An event may also trigger several a
184. ert Scheduler window Add Monitor to Startup group Installation dependent feature Available only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service this feature is not relevant See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences Adds the Monitor application to Windows Startup group making the Monitor application open automatically each time Windows is started on the computer Allow cameras to run in the background Installation dependent feature Available only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service this feature is not relevant See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences If selected it will be possible to let some or all of the cameras connected to the ProSight SMB server run in the background i e without the cameras being included in the Monitor application For such background cameras the features of the Monitor application will not be immediately available although recorded images from such cameras can still be browsed in the Monitor application s Viewer However background cameras can be accessed for viewing of live and recorded images through a NetGuard or NetGuard EVS
185. erver has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service the features described in the following will not be available from the Monitor application See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences Note that if the Monitor application is not installed on your surveillance system you may still include a standalone version of the Viewer when exporting database content from NetGuard EVS including the Viewer in the export will provide recipients for example investigators police authorities etc with a convenient tool for browsing the exported database content To print evidence from the Viewer use the following procedure OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 115 Select the required camera in the camera layout see Using the Viewer and browse to the image you want to print Click the Print icon The Print icon This will open the Print control panel The Print control panel Fill in the Operator s Note Company and Operator fields Click the Print button to print the evidence on your default Windows printer The printed surveillance report will contain the selected image information about camera name image capture time and
186. es You must have configured IP address password etc on the device itself as described by the manufacturer 1 Open the Administrator window OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 14 2 In the Administrator window click the Add Device button This will start the Device Setup Wizard 3 On the first step of the wizard identify the required device either by Typing the IP address of the device Tip To jump to the next IP address segment in the field press SPACE on your keyboard or Typing the DNS host name of the device This requires that you select the Use DNS host names box Specifying the IP address of a device Note By default HTTP port 80 and FTP port 21 will be used for the device If the device you are adding uses other port numbers click the Port Setup button and specify required port numbers The need for specifying different ports may often apply if the device is located behind a NAT enabled router or a firewall When this is the case also remember to configure the router firewall so it maps the ports and IP address used by the device When ready click Next to go to the second step of the wizard 4 If a password is used for the device type the password for the device s administrator account called an admin or root acc
187. ess Remote users access the Web Server and Realtime Feed Server through an Internet Explorer browser OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 6 The following are minimum system requirements for running ProSight SMB and associated applications Surveillance System Server Operating System Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Windows 2000 Server and Advanced Server Windows XP Professional 32 and 64 bit or Windows Server 2003 32 and 64 bit CPU Intel Pentium 4 or higher Intel Xeon recommended minimum 2 4 GHz RAM Minimum 1 GB Network Ethernet 1 Gbit recommended Graphics Adapter AGP or PCI Express minimum 1024 768 16 bit colors Hard Disk Type E IDE PATA SATA SCSI SAS 7200 rpm or faster Hard Disk Space 80 GB free depends on number of cameras and recording settings Software DirectX 9 0 or newer required to run the live view Monitor application Tip To check which DirectX version is installed on a computer click Start select Run and type dxdiag When you click OK the DirectX Diagnostic Tool window will open version information is displayed near the bottom of its System tab Should the server require a DirectX update the latest versions of DirectX are available from http www microsoft com downloads NetGuar
188. ess image rotation and similar Include Date and Time in Image The Camera Settings section may feature an Include Date and Time in Image check box When selected date and time from the camera will be included in images from the camera Note As cameras are separate units which may have separate timing devices power supplies etc camera time and ProSight SMB system time may not correspond fully and this may occasionally lead to confusion As all images are time stamped by ProSight SMB upon reception and exact date and time information for each image is thus already known it is recommended that you keep the Include Date and Time in Image check box cleared Should you want to use the Include Date and Time in Image feature it is recommended that you click the Synchronize Time button if available Clicking the Synchronize Time button will set camera time to system time but does not guarantee that camera time will match system time indefinitely Tip For consistent synchronization you may if supported by the camera auto synchronize camera and system time via a time server Preview Image When adjusting camera settings you are able to view the effect of your settings by clicking the Preview Image button located at the bottom of the window Clicking the Preview Image button will provide you with an image from the camera in question as it would look with the settings specified in the Camera Settings section When you have found the best po
189. ets you view a graph displaying sequences of recordings from the selected camera The motion levels indicated in the graph can be used as an indication of what has been recorded The graph is dragable allowing you to browse the sequences Motion view graph To use motion view click the Motion View icon in the toolbar to open the Motion View control panel in which the dragable graph is displayed Motion View icon A change in the color of the graph indicates the start of a new motion sequence The black vertical line at the center of the graph indicates the point in time from which recordings are being displayed in the camera layout What to Do To browse recordings using motion view click inside the graph area and move your mouse sideways to browse recordings Images are updated when you release the mouse button OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 112 Browsing Recordings with the Alarm Overview Alarm overview lets you view a list of sequences with detected motion for a selected camera Listed motion sequences or events are clickable allowing you to quickly jump to the time at which motion was detected or an event occurred To use the alarm overview click the Alarm Overview icon in the toolbar to open the Alarm Overview control panel in which the list is di
190. ew button 1 Select the required layout for your new view Example only You are able to select layouts for displaying up to 64 8 8 cameras in a single view Tip Some of the selectable view layouts are marked Wide These view layouts are especially suitable for widescreen monitors 2 A new view is created under the group you selected The new view carries the default name New View plus an indication of the selected layout 3 Overwrite the default name with a view name of your choice You are now able to add cameras to the view Tip A group can contain an unlimited number of views You may also create any number of subgroups if required Tip For information about adding content cameras etc to views see How to Add Content to Views OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 140 Assigning Shortcut Numbers to Views Note Your ability to edit views and groups depends on your user rights Basically if you are able to create the view or group you are also able to edit it On the Setup tab you are able to assign shortcut numbers to views Shortcut numbers allow users to select views using NetGuard EVS s standard keyboard shortcuts To assign a shortcut number to a view do the following Note Illustrations used in the following are examples only top
191. ey do not already exist they will be created automatically 8 If you want to include a stand alone Viewer application in the database export select the Include Viewer Program Files check box If you include the Viewer application in the export the exported databases can be viewed and browsed on any PC no additional surveillance system software will be required Read more about the Viewer application in Using the Viewer Tip A Viewer application included in a database export will if possible match the language version of your NetGuard EVS If the Viewer application is not available in a matching language version an English language version of the Viewer application will be included 9 Click the Export button to begin the export The status bar in the upper part of the export dialog will display the status of the export Export status bar Tip If you are exporting very large databases export may take a while You can continue to use NetGuard EVS for other purposes while the export process is underway If the Close On Completion check box is selected default the export dialog will automatically close when the export is finished You are now able to distribute the content of the Exported Database folder OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 165 Tip If you
192. fault file name to a name of your choice simply by overwriting the default file name Remember that the file name must include the avi file extension 11 Specify export destination If you select Desktop your exported file will be saved in an automatically created Exported Images folder on the desktop of your PC If you select Path you are able to specify a path yourself The exported file will be saved in an automatically created Exported Images folder under the path you specify example If you specify a path like C My Stuff My Files the exported file will be saved in C My Stuff My Files Exported Images When specifying a path this way the folders you specify do not have to be existing ones if they do not already exist they will be created automatically 12 Click the Export link to begin the export OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 189 The status bar in the upper part of the export dialog will display the status of the export Tip If you are exporting very long sequences export may depending on your selected export settings take a while You can continue to use NetGuard for other purposes while the export process is underway If the Close On Completion check box is selected default the export dialog will automatically close when the export is finish
193. features a number of buttons for use when adding and configuring the events Button Description Add new event Used for defining input events on the device selected in the Defined events list Depending on the type of device you may be able to define one or more input events on the device Some devices do not support input output at all Refer to the release notes for device specific information Devices Capable of Handling One Input Event Only If the device is capable of handling one input event only the button will open the Add New Event window for devices capable of handling one input event only in which you define the input event and any e mail alerts to be associated with it If you have already defined an input event on a device capable of handling one input event only the Add new event button will not be available when the device is selected in the Defined events list However if you click the plus sign next to the device in the Defined events list and select the defined input event the Add new event button becomes available for defining timer events see Timer Events in the following Devices Capable of Handling Several Input Events If the device is capable of handling more than one input event the button will open the Multiple Input Events window in which you define which of the device s possible input events should be enabled and whether any alerts should be associated with enabled input events Timer Events
194. ger window Access You access the Monitor Manager window by clicking the Monitor Manager button in the Administrator window Note that the button is only available when the recording server has been installed as an application The Monitor Manager window features a Layout Size list as well as a Configuration section Layout Size List In the Layout Size list you select the required grid for use in the Monitor application s camera layout Options are 1 1 2 2 3 3 etc up to an 8 8 grid A 3 3 camera layout grid for example will allow display of up to 9 cameras Selecting a 3 3 camera layout grid OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 45 Configuration Section In the Monitor Manager window s Configuration section you select which cameras to display in the camera layout grid You also select whether the Monitor s hot spot and carousel features should be enabled Feature Description Select Camera Lets you select a particular camera for use in a particular position in the camera layout grid Select a position in the camera layout grid then select a camera from the list to display images from the selected camera in the selected position Note Camera images are only transferred to ProSight SMB while the Monitor application is running Hot Spot Win
195. gh position The more you drag the slider towards the High position the more of the preview image becomes highlighted This is because with a high noise sensitivity even the slightest change in a pixel will be regarded as motion OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 31 Motion Sensitivity The Motion Sensitivity slider determines how many pixels must change in the image before it is regarded as motion The selected motion sensitivity level is indicated by the black vertical line in the motion level indication bar below the preview image The black vertical line serves as a threshold When detected motion is above the selected sensitivity level the bar changes color from green to red indicating a positive detection As an alternative to using the slider you may specify a value between 0 and 10 000 in the field next to the slider to control the motion sensitivity setting Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The Color window lets you select a color to be used for highlighting detected motion when images from a camera are viewed in the Monitor application Access You access the Color window by clicking the Motion Color button in the Camera Settings for Device Name C
196. ghts The Administrator window the main window in the Administrator application is used by the surveillance system administrator for configuring ProSight SMB upon installation or whenever configuration adjustments are required e g when adding new cameras to the system Access You access the Administrator application by selecting it from Window s Start menu or by clicking the Administrator shortcut on the desktop If the Monitor application is installed and access from the Monitor application is enabled the Administrator application may also be accessed from the Monitor application Access to the Administrator application may be password protected in which case you will be asked to provide the administrator password in the Administrator Login window Administrator desktop shortcut OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 8 The Administrator window features a Device Manager section as well as a number of buttons providing access to configuration Device Manager Section The Device Manager section located in the middle of the Administrator window lists all added devices and attached cameras The Device Manager section thus provides you with an overview of your surveillance system Detail from the Administrator window s Device Manager section two devices
197. h CTRL or ALT Example CTRL B i e first pressing the CTRL key then while still pressing the CTRL key pressing the B key This will display the pressed key combination in the Press shortcut key field 4 In the Select action list select the required action for the shortcut key combination Note Some actions will only work when the keyboard shortcut is used in certain contexts For example a keyboard shortcut with a PTZ related action will only work when using a PTZ camera 5 In the Use new shortcut in list select when the shortcut key combination should apply Global When working on any of NetGuard EVS s three tabs Live Browse and Setup Browse Mode When working on NetGuard EVS s Browse tab only Live Mode When working on NetGuard EVS s Live tab only Setup Mode When working on NetGuard EVS s Setup tab only 6 Click the Assign button This will add the specified shortcut key combination to the Assigned keys list OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 153 Example of user defined keyboard shortcuts 7 Click OK Tip Your shortcut key combinations are kept as part of your user settings on the surveillance system server This means that you will be able to use your shortcut key combinations on any computer that has a NetGuard EVS
198. h of the device s input ports For exact information about what constitutes the various input events refer to documentation for the sensors and device in question My list contains event related to motion and or object detection what s this Some devices have their own capabilities for detecting motion and or moving static objects A motion or object detection related input event is very likely to be an option from such a device The settings determining this kind of detection are configured on the device itself typically by accessing a browser based configuration interface on the device s IP address For more information refer to the documentation for the device in question Enabled Input Event s Lists enabled input events for the device You enable an event by selecting it in the Available Input Event s list then clicking the gt gt button See description in the following gt gt You enable an event by selecting it in the Available Input Event s list then clicking the gt gt button to open the Add New Event window for devices capable of handling several input events in which you specify a name for the input event and any e mail alerts to be associated with it When you click OK in the Add New Event window for devices capable of handling several input events the selected input event is automatically transferred from OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59
199. he Allow cameras to run in the background check box in the Advanced section of the General Settings window must be selected For background cameras to work they must be enabled see description of the Administrator window s Device Manager section Even if no cameras are included in the Monitor application remember that camera images are only transferred to ProSight SMB while the recording server in this case the Monitor application is running The Monitor application must therefore run whenever you want to record images from cameras on your surveillance system A running Monitor is also a prerequisite for viewing live images in NetGuard and NetGuard EVS OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 98 Monitor Application The Monitor application is installation dependent and available only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service the features described in the following will not be available See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences If installed the Monitor application is used for recording and displaying recordings from connected cameras with optional indications of registered activit
200. he Group Control section click the Delete button You will be asked to confirm that you want to delete the group and all of its views Renaming Views To rename a view do the following on the Setup tab 1 Select the required view in the Views section 2 In the View Control section overwrite the existing name in the View Name field 3 Click the Rename button Deleting Views To delete a view do the following on the Setup tab 1 Select the required view in the Views section 2 In the View Control section click the Delete button You will be asked to confirm that you want to delete the view Adjusting Camera Settings In the Setup tab s Camera Control section you are able to adjust camera settings OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 179 To adjust camera settings select the position of the required camera in the view The position you select will be indicated by a bold border Image Quality The Image Quality setting determines the quality of the images when viewed but also affects bandwidth usage If NetGuard is used over the internet over a slow network connection or if for other reasons you need to limit the bandwidth used by NetGuard image quality can be reduced on the server side by selecting e g Low or Medium Tip You can quickly re
201. he Setup tab you are not able to create views 2 On the Setup tab look at the Views section The Group folders to which you do not have access will be indicated by padlock icons Consult your system administrator if in doubt about your user rights OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 174 Creating Views in Private Groups To create your first view in a private group you first create a group then create the required view within the group If you have created views in private groups before you may create new views in existing private groups or you may create a new private group for the view Note Views are created on NetGuard s Setup tab Particular user rights may be required in order to access the Setup tab Creating a Private Group To create a private group do the following on the Setup tab 1 In the Setup tab s Views section select the Private folder or if you have created private groups before any folder labeled Private 2 In the Setup tab s Group Control section type a name for the group in the Group Name field then click the New button Your new group will now appear in the Setup tab s Views section with the name you have specified and labeled as Private You are now able to create a view within the group Creating a View in a Priva
202. he signal on the input sensor rises or falls Low Trigger input event when the signal on the sensor is falling High Trigger input event when the signal on the sensor is rising For exact information about what constitutes a falling and a rising signal respectively refer to documentation for the sensor and device in question External event name Lets you specify a name for the input event Note Event names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp Send e mail if this event occurs Select check box to send an e mail alert when the input occurs Note In order to be able to use e mail alerts the e mail alert feature must have been set up in the E Mail setup window Include image from camera Available only if the Send e mail if this event occurs check box is selected Select check box to include an image recorded at the time the input event is triggered in the e mail alert then select the required camera in the list next to the check box Not applicable Not applicable Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 66 The Multiple Input Events window is used for de
203. he sub directory named after the device s MAC address will always be _1 Example e g 00408c51e181_1 Storing Archives at Other Locations than the Default Archiving Directory You are of course also able to store archives in other directories than the default archiving directory However you cannot archive to external drives only to a local drive on the computer running ProSight SMB Archiving Audio If audio is enabled on a device audio from the device will also be archived If the device is a video server with several channels audio will be archived with the camera on channel 1 When an audio source is enabled audio is recorded to the associated camera s database This will affect the database s capacity for storing video It is thus important to bear in mind that the maximum limit of the database is likely to be reached earlier if recording audio and video than if only recording video Storage Capacity Required for Archiving The storage capacity required for archiving depends entirely on the amount of recordings you plan to archive Some organizations want to keep archived recordings from a large number of cameras for several months or years Other organizations may only want to archive recordings from one or two cameras and they may want to keep their archives for much shorter periods of time Before enabling archiving you should always consider the storage capacity of the local drive containing the default archiving directory to wh
204. however that only one of the ways will work for NetGuard users OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 127 Basic user Lets you create a dedicated surveillance system user account with basic user name and password authentication for each individual user This method works for NetGuard as well as NetGuard EVS users Windows user Lets you import individual users and authenticate them based on their Windows login This method only works for NetGuard EVS users Each of the two methods is described in the following How to Add a New Basic User To define a new dedicated surveillance system user account with basic user name and password authentication click the User administration window s Add Basic User button specify required user name and password and click OK This will add the user to the User administration window s list of users In the list s Type column the user will appear as a Basic User A Basic user is furthermore indicated by a blue dot next to the user icon Example How to Add a New Windows User Prerequisites The users you want to add must have been defined as local PC users on the server Simple file sharing must be disabled on the server To disable simple file sharing right click Windows Start button and select Explore In the window that opens selec
205. ht SMB Scheduling is handled by the system administrator in the Administrator application However even if a camera is not scheduled to be online users with sufficient user rights can start a camera i e make it transfer images to ProSight SMB from the Monitor by using the Monitor s Manual Mode feature See further information in the description of the Monitor s control panel The Monitor application opens in full screen view This provides you with the best possible view of the camera images displayed The Monitor basically consists of two sections a camera layout section in which camera images are displayed and a control panel with buttons for controlling the various features of the Monitor Monitor s Camera Layout The Monitor s camera layout section displays images from each camera specified by the system administrator Depending on the system administrator s settings in the Administrator application the camera layout may contain images from up to 25 different cameras Image Bars Each camera from which images are displayed in the camera layout is identified by an image bar located in the top of each camera image The image bar is blue When you select a particular camera in the camera layout the image bar of the selected camera image becomes a lighter blue OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711
206. ht SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 194 System Administrator s Check List ProSight SMB system administrators wishing to create and distribute navigation HTML pages to NetGuard users do the following 1 Create the required HTML page The navigation controls in the HTML page must match the views users see in their NetGuards For example in order for a button leading to View1 to work a view called View1 must exist If you intend to distribute a navigation HTML page to a group of users the views in which the HTML page will be used should be placed in shared groups 2 Save the HTML page locally on each computer on which it will be used When saving the HTML page locally save it at a location to which an unambiguous path can be defined for example in a folder on the user s C drive example C myfolder file htm Saving the HTML page on the user s desktop or in the user s My Documents folder will not work properly due to the way Windows constructs the path to such locations 3 Verify that NetGuards in which the HTML page will be used are locally installed versions If not download and install NetGuard software on each computer on which the HTML page will be used 4 Import the HTML page into NetGuard views in which it will be used 5 Test that the navigation controls on the imp
207. ialog in which you select the required camera This way you are able to define a VMD event for each camera on a multi camera device Edit selected Lets you edit the settings for an item selected in the Defined events list For devices capable of handling a single input event only the button will open the Edit Event window for editing input events For devices capable of handling several input events the button will open the Multiple Input Events window If the selected item is a timer event the button will open the New Timer window If the selected item is an output the button will open the Edit Output window Remove selected Lets you remove an event selected in the Defined events list Note The selected event will be removed without further warning Advanced Opens the Advanced window in which you are able to specify network settings to be used in connection with event handling which ports to use for FTP alerts and SMTP input output events as well as which polling frequency to use on devices requiring polling Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The Add New Event window for devices capable of handling one input event only lets you specify the settings for an input event on devices capable of handling one input event only OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59
208. ible Function Calls elsewhere in this topic to add further functionality to scs scripts In the following example we have added a line so the scs script from the previous example will log in to http ourserver with the current Windows user then minimize NetGuard EVS application lt ScriptEngine gt lt Login gt lt ServerAddress gt http ourserver lt ServerAddress gt lt AuthenticationType gt WindowsDefault lt AuthenticationType gt lt Login gt lt Script gt SCS Application Minimize lt Script gt lt ScriptEngine gt Format Valid parameter formats are param value Examples UserName Tommy UserName Tommy UserName Tommy Username Tommy Password Tommy Day to Day Use With NetGuard EVS you are able to quickly export video evidence in the AVI movie clip JPEG still image and the surveillance system database formats Note Export in the database format is available when connected to selected surveillance systems only Depending on your user rights access to exporting AVI JPEG and database evidence from some or all cameras may be restricted Exporting in AVI and JPEG Formats To export video evidence in the AVI or JPEG formats do the following Note Date and time formats used when browsing recorded images may vary depending on your computer s regional settings 1 Select NetGuard EVS s Browse tab 2 In the Browse tab s Export section specify when the period to be covered by the e
209. ich archives are always moved even though they may immediately after be moved to an archiving location on a network drive As a rule of thumb the capacity of the local drive should be at least twice the size required for storing the databases of all cameras for which archiving has been specified Note You cannot archive to external drives only to a local drive on the computer running ProSight SMB In short When estimating storage capacity required for archiving consider your organization s needs then plan for worst case rather than best case scenarios Backing Up Archives Many organizations want to back up recordings from cameras using tape drives or similar Creating such backups based on the content of camera databases is not recommended it may cause sharing violations or other malfunctions Instead create such backups based on the content of archives If you have not specified separate archiving locations for separate cameras you could simply back up the default local archiving directory Archives When scheduling a backup make sure the backup job does not overlap with your specified archiving time OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 94 Viewing Archived Recordings You view archived recordings in the Viewer or NetGuard EVS This way you are able to use
210. iew or zoomed IPIX views To export video evidence do the following 1 Select NetGuard s Browse tab 2 In the Browse tab s Export section specify start date and time for the export by typing the date in the first Start Time field and the time in the second field Tip Instead of manually specifying date and time you may use the Browse tab s Time Navigation features to move to the required start point then click the upper of the Export section s Set links This will automatically set the date and time of the viewed image into the Start Time fields 3 In the End Time fields specify end date and time for the export As was the case with the start date and time end date and time must be in the correct format if specified manually Alternatively use the Set link as described above 4 Select the required camera from the Source list 5 Click the Export button This will open a separate export dialog The export dialog will list the specified start time end time and camera OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 188 6 In the export dialog select the required export format AVI movie clip or JPEG still images 7 Select whether to add timestamps from the surveillance system to the exported images If selected timestamps will appear in the corner of the image
211. ill only be able to use preset positions defined on the camera video server itself when this is the case the preset positions are typically defined through the camera video server s built in web page For relative positioning PTZ cameras allowing definition of preset positions through the ProSight SMB system you define a preset position by moving the PTZ camera to the required position with the controls in the PTZ View section then naming the position in the window s Preset Positions section How to Define a Preset Position To define a preset position do the following Note Some PTZ cameras of the relative positioning kind do not allow you to define preset positions as described in the following for such cameras you should define preset positions on the camera video server itself 1 First use the controls in the PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name Camera Name window s PTZ View section to move the PTZ camera to the required position 2 Having moved the PTZ camera to the required position select an undefined item may be labeled Undefined or with a position number in the Preset Positions section s list of preset position names and click the Set Position button to define a name for the preset position OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 37 For de
212. in the Device Manager section are by default enabled meaning that video from cameras and audio from attached microphones is by default transferred to ProSight SMB provided that the cameras are marked as online in the Camera Alert Scheduler Window also default IMPORTANT The use of audio sources will impact the database capacity for storing video see Important Information about Using Audio for more information Note On some devices audio can also be enabled disabled on the device itself typically through the device s own configuration web page If audio on a device does not work after enabling it in the Administrator application you should thus verify whether the problem may be due to audio being disabled on the device itself If required you can disable individual cameras and audio sources listed in the Device Manager section When a camera or audio source is disabled no images audio will be transferred from the camera audio source to ProSight SMB Note If the Monitor application is installed and the camera in question including any attached microphones is included in the Monitor application configured in the Monitor Manager window the camera audio source cannot be disabled When this is the case remove the camera from the Monitor Manager window s layout before disabling the camera OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400
213. installed provided you log in to NetGuard EVS with your own user name and password Deleting a Shortcut Key Combination To delete an existing keyboard shortcut from the Assigned keys list simply select the unwanted shortcut in the list then click the Delete button In NetGuard EVS you are able to select between several language versions To select a language do the following 1 Click the Show Application Menu button in the right side of NetGuard EVS s top bar 2 From the menu that appears select Language then the required language 3 NetGuard EVS must be restarted in order for the change to take effect Close your NetGuard EVS then log in again to use the new language version In addition to displaying images from cameras NetGuard EVS is able to display static images and HTML pages Such HTML pages may be used for intuitively switching between different views in NetGuard EVS For example you may insert a clickable floor plan of a building and you would be able to simply click a part of the floor plan to instantly switch to a view displaying images from the required part of the building In the following you will see examples of HTML pages for NetGuard EVS navigation a simple HTML page with buttons and a more advanced HTML page with a clickable image map For surveillance system administrators wishing to create and distribute such HTML pages to NetGuard EVS users a check list outlining the tasks involved is also provided Tip NetGu
214. io click the Mute Audio button in the Monitor s control panel Recording is not affected by muting audio in the Monitor Running Out of Disk Space Alert In order to warn you of an impending possibility of losing data the Monitor will prominently display the message Running out of disk space if available disk space on the ProSight SMB server goes below 150 MB plus 20 MB per camera Example For a system with ten cameras the alert will show if the available disk space goes below 350 MB 150 MB plus 20 MB for each of the ten cameras Consult your surveillance system administrator if you see this message Monitor How to The Monitor application is installation dependent and available only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service the features described in the following will not be available See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences Clicking the PTZ Menu button in the Monitor application s control panel gives you access to a menu for controlling a PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom camera selected in the Monitor s camera layout Example of PTZ Menu with preset position buttons Note The PTZ menu is only functional when the camera selected in the Monitor application s camera layout is a PTZ camera Use of the PTZ Menu may require certain user rights OnSSI ProSight SMB U
215. io source attached Note The Audio feature is available in NetGuard EVS only not in NetGuard In the Browse column the following features all selected by default are available Browse Ability to browse recorded images from the selected camera AVI JPG Export Ability to generate and export evidence as movie clips in the AVI format and as still images in the JPG format Database Export Ability to generate and export evidence in database format Note This feature is not available in ProSight SMB Sequences Ability to use the Sequences feature for browsing images from a selected camera Smart Search Ability to use NetGuard EVS s Smart Search feature with which users are able to search for motion in one or more selected areas of images from the selected camera Note This feature is not available in ProSight SMB OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 131 Audio Ability to listen to live sound from the selected camera s audio source available only if selected camera has an audio source attached Note The Audio feature is available in NetGuard EVS only not in NetGuard Tip Note that some of the features are mutually dependent For example in order have access to PTZ or output features a user must also have access to viewing live images and in order to use AV
216. ipse X Moves the ellipse to the left X Moves the ellipse to the right Y Moves the ellipse up Y Moves the ellipse down Previewing the IPIX View You are able to toggle between previewing the fish eye view and the IPIX rendered view i e the original elliptic view as well as the flattened rectangular view resulting from applying the IPIX algorithm according to your specified values To toggle between the two different types of preview click the Toggle Preview button When previewing the IPIX rendered view the following navigation buttons become available for moving around within the preview image area Moves the IPIX rendered view up and to the left Moves the IPIX rendered view up Moves the IPIX rendered view up and to the right OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 42 Moves the IPIX rendered view to the left Moves the IPIX rendered view to its home position Moves the IPIX rendered view to the right Moves the IPIX rendered view down and to the left Moves the IPIX rendered view down Moves the IPIX rendered view down and to the right Zoom out one zoom level per click Zoom in one zoom level per click Ceiling Mounted Cameras If the camera is mounted on a ceiling you can adjust the behavior of the navigation bu
217. ire certain user rights See the description of the Admin Login button HotSpot Available only when use of a hot spot in a separate floating window has been set up by the system administrator Opens the separate hot spot window Carousel Available only when use of the hot spot s carousel feature has been enabled by the system administrator Click to toggle the carousel feature on and off PTZ Menu Opens the PTZ menu with which you are able to control PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras Note The PTZ menu is only functional when the camera selected in the camera layout is a PTZ camera Use of the PTZ menu may require certain user rights See the description of the Admin Login button See a detailed description of the PTZ menu in How to Use the PTZ Menu Tip To hide the PTZ menu simply click the PTZ Menu button again Manual Mode Lets you toggle between scheduled mode cameras transferring images to ProSight SMB according to a schedule defined in the Administrator application and manual mode With manual mode you can start a camera i e make it transfer images to ProSight SMB from the Monitor even if the camera is not scheduled to be online When manual mode is selected Manual Mode button depressed three buttons the Stop Start button the Start All button and the Stop All button become available enabling you to start and stop cameras manually Note When in manual mode all scheduled camera activity for all cameras including automa
218. irst click a preset bank button A E to display the preset position buttons in the required bank then click the required preset position button 1 5 to move the PTZ camera to the required preset position Tip You may use the A E and 1 5 keys on your keyboard to move the PTZ camera to preset positions OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 105 Point and Click PTZ Control Point and click control is supported for absolute positioning PTZ cameras as well as some relative positioning PTZ cameras when a hot spot and the PTZ Menu are enabled If the mouse pointer changes to crosshairs when positioned in the hot spot you are able to control the PTZ camera by clicking in the hot spot Crosshairs The PTZ camera will center on the point you click If you click and hold down the left mouse button then move the mouse up or down you will get access to a zoom slider For some cameras crosshairs surrounded by a square may be displayed When this is the case you are able to zoom in on an area by dragging a square around the required area in the hot spot For such cameras zoom level is controlled by holding down the SHIFT key on your keyboard while moving the mouse up or down this will display a zoom level slider inside the hot spot PTZ on Event PTZ cameras may be set
219. isplayed in the camera layout Motion View Opens the Motion View control panel in which you are able to view a graph displaying sequences with motion The graph is dragable allowing you to browse the sequences Alarm Overview Opens the Alarm Overview control panel in which you are able to view a list of generated motion and event alarms By clicking alarms in the list you are able to browse recordings from around the time at which the alarms were generated Image Controls Opens the Image Controls control panel in which you have access to digital zoom and interlacing settings Export Opens the Export control panel with which you are able to export entire video and audio sequences in different formats Print Opens the Print control panel from which you are able to print images from the camera selected in the camera layout Smart Search Not available in ProSight SMB Send E mail Report Opens the Send E mail Report control panel from which you are able to send evidence via e mail NetTransact Opens the NetTransact control panel from which you are able to specify settings for the NetTransact add on product for handling loss prevention through video evidence combined with time linked POS or ATM transaction data Note The NetTransact toolbar icon is only available if the NetTransact add on product is used with your surveillance system For more information about using NetTransact in the Viewer see separate NetTransact document
220. ite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 53 Event Recording Settings As opposed to the general log files which contain information about activity on the surveillance system itself event log files contain information about registered events for more information about events see About Input Events amp Output The Event Recording Settings section lets you specify where to keep event log files and how long for Event log files should be viewed using the Monitor application s Viewer or NetGuard EVS Viewer Select the Viewer s Alarm Overview control panel then click the Events button to view the events log Installation dependent feature The Viewer is available only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service the Viewer is not available See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences NetGuard EVS In the Browse tab s Alerts section select the required event then click the Get List button to see when the event in question was detected Path By default event log files are stored in the folder containing the ProSight SMB software To specify another location for your log files type the path to the required folder in the Path field or click the browse button next to the field to brows
221. ive will depend on the motion detection sensitivity of the camera in question If motion detection for the camera is highly sensitive you may at times receive very frequent sound notifications The camera s motion detection sensitivity is configured on the surveillance system server consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt If you select sound notifications for more than one camera you may also hear more notifications again depending on the cameras motion detection sensitivity Tip By default NetGuard EVS uses a simple sound file for its sound notifications The sound file called Notification wav is located in NetGuard EVS installation folder If you want to use another wav file as your notification sound simply name the required file Notification wav and place it in NetGuard EVS installation folder instead of the original file The file Notification wav is used for event as well as motion detection notifications it is not possible to use different sound files for different cameras or to distinguish between event and motion detection notifications OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 149 Sound on Event Note This feature is only available if using your NetGuard EVS with certain surveillance systems Even when using your NetGuard EVS with a su
222. l 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 58 Joystick Buttons Section The Joystick Buttons section lets you specify which joystick buttons should be used for particular actions To assign an action to a particular joystick button select the required action in the list then click the required joystick button When a button is assigned to an action the name of the button will be listed together with the name of the action To stop using a particular joystick button for a particular action select the button action in the list then click the Unselect button To free all joystick buttons from their associated actions click the Unselect All button Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The E Mail setup window lets you enable and configure the use of e mail alerts Such e mail alerts can automatically be sent to one or more recipients when motion is detected or specific events see About Input Events amp Output occur By default SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is used when sending e mail alerts Compared with other mail transfer methods SMTP has the advantage that you will avoid automatically triggered warnings from your e mail client when an e mail alert is to be sent Such automatically triggered wa
223. l 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 85 window If Adding the Timer Event under an Already Defined Event Button Click the Administrator window s Event Buttons button to open the Event Buttons window In the Event Buttons window s Defined Events list select the required event button then click the Add new event button to open the New Timer window 2 In the New Timer window the Timer event is started by field will show the name of the selected event or event button Now specify information in the following fields Timer event name Specify a name for the timer event Note that event names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp Timer event occurs after Specify the amount of time that should pass between the event occurring event button being clicked and the timer event in either seconds or minutes When ready click OK 3 In the window from which you opened the New Timer window your newly defined timer event will now be listed Timer event in this example associated with a VMD event listed in I O Setup window You may have to click the expand icon in front of the name of the required device as well as the required main event to see the timer event Timer event associated with an event button listed in Event Buttons window You
224. l appear in the carousel is automatically determined by their names which are typically made up along the structure Device name Camera name The cameras will appear in alphabetical order even if you select cameras from more than one server then loop continuously When you have selected cameras specify the carousel s other properties which are Image Quality Select between Full default SuperHigh for megapixel High Medium or Low The setting will apply for all cameras included in the carousel Frame Rate Lets you select a frame rate for the carousel Select between Unlimited default Medium or Low The setting will apply for all cameras included in the carousel OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 143 The effect of your selection can be illustrated by the following table Effect Unlimited Medium Low JPEG Send all frames Send every 4th frame Send every 20th frame MPEG IFrame Send all frames Send all frames Send all frames MPEG PFrame Send all frames Do not send any frames Do not send any frames Example If you set the Frame Rate option to Low in your NetGuard EVS and your surveillance system administrator has configured a camera to feed JPEG images at a frame rate of 20 frames per second you will experience an average of 1 frame
225. l be a global event button available for all cameras Manual event name Lets you specify a name for the event button Note Event button names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp Send e mail if this event occurs Select check box to send an e mail alert when the event button is clicked Note In order to be able to use e mail alerts the e mail alert feature must have been set up in the E Mail setup window Include image from camera Available only if the Send e mail if this event occurs check box is selected Select check box to include an image recorded at the time the event button is clicked in the e mail alert then select the required camera in the list below the check box Not applicable Not applicable Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The Edit Event window for editing event buttons lets you edit the settings for an existing event button Access You access the Edit Event window for editing event buttons from the Event Buttons window by first selecting the required event button in the Defined Events list then clicking the Edit selected button OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 77
226. lance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 68 Edit Event Window s Fields The Edit Event window for editing input events contains the following fields Field Description External sensor connected to Read only field displaying the name of the device on which the input event is defined Sensor connected through Lets you select which of the device s input ports the sensor used for the input event should be connected to Event occurs when input goes Lets you select whether the input event should be triggered when the signal on the input sensor rises or falls Low Trigger input event when the signal on the sensor is falling High Trigger input event when the signal on the sensor is rising For exact information about what constitutes a falling and a rising signal respectively refer to documentation for the sensor and device in question External event name Lets you edit the name of the input event Note Event names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp Send e mail if this event occurs Select check box to send an e mail alert when the input occurs Note In order to be able to use e mail alerts the e mail alert feature must have been set up in the E Mail setup window Include image from camera Available only if the Send e mail if this e
227. ld recognize as coming from a local network Define local IP ranges window Access You access the Define local IP ranges window by clicking the Local IP Ranges button in the ImageServer Administrator window To define a local IP address range in the Define local IP ranges window do the following Specify the beginning of the IP address range in the Define local IP ranges window s first field and the end of the IP address range in the second field Click the Add button The IP address range will be added to the list in the lower part of the Define local IP ranges window You may define as many local IP address ranges as required If required an IP address range may include only one IP address example 192 168 10 1 192 168 10 1 When ready click the Define local IP ranges window s Close button to return to the ImageServer Administrator window Tip There is no feature for editing an already defined IP address range in the Define local IP ranges window However you can simply select the range in question in the Define local IP ranges window s list delete it by clicking the Delete button and then simply add a new range reflecting your requirements The Image Server s User administration window lets you define NetGuard and NetGuard EVS users Access You access the User administration window by clicking the User Setup button in the ImageServer Administrator window You are able to add new users in two ways which may be combined Note
228. lds Field Description Desired framerate Specify required number of frames in first field and select required unit per Second per Minute or per Hour from the list Example 8 frames per second Tip When you specify a frame rate the interval between images is automatically calculated and displayed to the right of the frame rate fields Enable speedup ProSight SMB is able to increase the frame rate of a camera if motion is detected or if an event occurs Select the check box to enable increased frame rate on motion detection or on an external event then specify the required conditions in the following fields On motion Available only if the Enable speedup check box is selected Select check box to use a higher frame rate when motion is detected Remember to specify the required higher frame rate in the Desired speedup framerate fields The camera will return to the original frame rate two seconds after the last motion is detected On event Note Use of speedup on event requires that events have been defined in the I O Setup window accessed by clicking the I O Setup button in the Administrator window Available only if the Enable speedup check box is selected Select check box to use a higher frame rate when an external event occurs and until another external event occurs then select required start and stop events in the Start and Stop lists The camera will increase its frame rate when the start event occurs and
229. le of a view sent to the Primary Display While you are viewing the separate full screen window the main NetGuard EVS window will be hidden behind it The separate full screen window will only show the selected view none of the Live or Browse tab s other features and it can only show one view at a time Any hotspots carousels still images or HTML pages included in the view will work as usual To send a view to Primary Display do the following 1 In the Live or Browse tab s Views section right click the required view This will bring up a menu 2 In the menu select Send View To gt Primary Display NetGuard EVS s standard keyboard shortcuts Note When using below listed shortcuts do not actually press the key When listing keyboard shortcuts the is used to indicate and then press Example For the keyboard shortcut ENTER you should thus only press the key then the ENTER key ENTER Toggles maximized regular display of the selected view position lt camera shortcut number gt ENTER Lets you change the camera displayed in the selected view position to the camera with the matching shortcut number Example If the required camera has the shortcut number 6 you would press 6 ENTER Note that camera shortcut numbers may not necessarily be used on your surveillance system Camera shortcut numbers are defined on the surveillance system server ask your surveillance system administrator if in doubt ENTER Changes the
230. lected camera output buttons may also be available Output buttons are used for triggering external output for example for switching on lights sounding a siren etc Ask your ProSight SMB system administrator if in doubt For PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras PTZ navigation buttons will also become available in the live view provided you have the user rights required to control PTZ cameras To return to viewing still images from the selected camera click the Still link in the live view Playback Note Certain user rights may be required in order to use this feature Switches to playback view for the selected camera Playback view lets you play back recorded images from the selected camera based on a date and time you specify in the playback view The pause and start buttons in the playback view lets you pause and start the live feed as required To return to viewing still images from the selected camera click the Still link in the playback view OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 205 Build AVI file Note Certain user rights may be required in order to use this feature Starts a wizard with which you are able to create and export an AVI movie clip of selected recordings Such movie clips may for example be used as evidence Print Lets you print the currently vie
231. level folders may have different names in your version In the Setup tab s Views section select the required view Specify the required shortcut number in the Shortcut field and press ENTER on your keyboard The specified shortcut number will now appear in brackets in front of the view s name This will also be the case on the Live and Browse tabs allowing users to quickly find a view s shortcut number Repeat as necessary for other views Renaming Views or Groups Note Your ability to edit views and groups depends on your user rights Basically if you are able to create the view or group you are also able to edit it To rename a view or group do the following on the Setup tab Select the required view or group in the Views section Click the Rename button Overwrite the existing group name with a new name of your choice Deleting Views or Groups IMPORTANT Deleting a group will delete all views and any subgroups within the group as well Note Your ability to edit and delete views and groups depends on your user rights Basically if you are able to create the view or group you are also able to edit and delete it To delete a view or group do the following on the Setup tab Select the required view or group in the Views section Click the Delete button You will be asked to confirm that you want to delete the selected view or group Using Your Views on Different Computers Your user settings including information about your views ar
232. licking the clear button then drag another camera to the cleared position or simply overwrite a position by dragging a different camera to the position OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 142 Adding Carousels A carousel is used for displaying images from several cameras one after the other in a single view position You are able to specify which cameras to include in the carousel as well as the interval between camera changes To add a carousel to a view do the following on the Setup tab Drag the System Overview section s Carousel link to the required position in the view Release the mouse button over the required position Tip Note that the position gets a thin green border The green border indicates that the position is used for a carousel the green border will also be evident when using the view on the Browse and Live tabs Thin green border indicates carousel When the carousel position is selected you are able to specify its properties in the Setup tab s Properties section Begin by selecting which cameras to include in the carousel In the following example we have selected four cameras Note that you are also able to select all cameras on a server in one go by selecting the check box next to the server icon The sequence in which cameras wil
233. line indicator the rightmost of the three indicators blinking green Changes state every time an image is received from the camera Enlarging Images from Particular Cameras in a View To enlarge images from a particular camera in a view double click the blue image bar above the image Double clicking blue bar above image enlarges view To return to normal view simply double click the blue image bar again Tip If you have selected reduced image quality for the camera on the Setup tab images from the camera will be displayed in full quality when viewed enlarged Output Control If the selected camera has external outputs defined for example for switching on lights or sounding a siren such outputs can be triggered from NetGuard Note Depending on your user rights access to triggering outputs for some cameras may be restricted To trigger an output first select the required camera in the view then select the required output in the Output Control section and click the Fire link PTZ Control PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom and IPIX technology allowing creation and viewing of 360 degree panoramic images cameras can be controlled from NetGuard Note Depending on your user rights access to PTZ controls from some cameras may be restricted Point and Click Control Many PTZ cameras may be controlled simply by pointing and clicking inside the images from the camera If you see a set of crosshairs when placing your mouse pointer over the i
234. log Web Server Log Files These files log activity on the Web Server if logging is enabled in the ProSight SMBHTTP Server window Web Server log files are by default placed in the folder containing the ProSight SMB software Web Server log files are named according to the structure www_YYYYMMDD log e g www_20070615 log Image Import Service Log Files These files log activity regarding the Image Import service which is used for fetching pre alarm images and storing the fetched images in the database Pre alarm images is a feature available for selected cameras only it enables sending of images from immediately before an event took place from the camera to the surveillance system via e mail Image Import Service log files are by default placed in the folder containing the ProSight SMB software Image Import Service log files are named according to the structure ImageImportLog_YYYMMDD log e g ImageImportLog20070615 log Log File Structures Most log files generated by ProSight SMB use a shared structure complying with the W3C Extended Log File Format Each log file consists of a header and a number of log lines The header outlines the information contained in the log lines The log lines consist of two main parts the log information itself and an encrypted part The encrypted part makes it possible through decryption and comparison to assert that a log file has not been tampered with OnSSI ProSight SMB User Man
235. lowing fields Field Description IP address or DNS Host Name IP address or DNS host name of the device in question Note If Use DNS host name check box is selected the name of the IP address field changes to DNS Host Name in order to accommodate a DNS host name rather than an IP address Use DNS host name By selecting the check box you are able to use a DNS host name for identifying the device instead of using the device s IP address When check box is selected the IP address field changes its name to DNS Host Name ready to accommodate a DNS host name rather than an IP address Default Http Port When selected HTTP traffic to the device will go through the default port port 80 If you want to use another port for HTTP traffic to the device clear the check box and specify required port number in the field to the left of the check box Default Ftp Port When selected FTP traffic to the device will go through the default port port 21 If you want to use another port for FTP traffic to the device clear the check box and specify required port number in the field to the left of the check box Root Password Password required in order to log in to the device using the root account occasionally known as an admin or administrator account Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights Note The number of settings availabl
236. lows users to start the Viewer feature in the Monitor application The Viewer lets users browse stored images export images etc PTZ Control Allows users to use the Monitor application s PTZ Menu with Pan Tilt Zoom controls for installed PTZ cameras Quick Browse Allows users to use the Monitor application s Quick Browse buttons for browsing newly stored images Note that use of the Quick Browse buttons requires that a Hot Spot is enabled in the Monitor application OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 52 Tip Configuration of user rights may vary from organization to organization However users are typically allowed access to the following features Application Setup Browser PTZ Control and Quick Browse Joystick Clicking the Joystick Setup opens the Joystick Setup window in which you are able to configure a joystick for use with PTZ cameras in the Monitor application Installation dependent feature Available only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service this feature is not relevant See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences Logfile Settings The Logfile Settings
237. m Windows Start menu if they have not been added to the startup folder when ProSight SMB was installed By default the Web Server uses port 81 and the Realtime Feed Server uses port 9513 Note Both servers must be started before they are active and remote users are able to connect to them If remote users should be able to view live images the Monitor application must be running as well OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 195 Web Server Configuration To configure the Web Server open the Web Server s Settings window the following way 1 Open Windows Start menu 2 Click All Programs 3 Select ProSight SMB gt Web Server The Web Server icon now appears in the notification area system tray at the far right of the Windows taskbar Web Server icon 4 Click the Web Server icon This will open the ProSight SMB Web Server window 5 In the ProSight SMB Web Server window click the Settings button This will open the Settings window in which you configure the Web Server Settings window The Settings window lets you configure the Web Server The Settings window is divided into two sections the Web Server setup section and the User administration section OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 2
238. mages from a PTZ camera point and click control is supported for the camera Crosshairs indicate point and click control For some cameras crosshairs may look different For some cameras crosshairs surrounded by a square may be displayed When this is the case you are able to zoom in on an area by dragging a square around the required area in the image For such cameras zoom level is controlled by holding down the SHIFT key on your keyboard while moving the mouse up or down this will display a zoom level slider inside the image OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 183 PTZ Navigation Buttons Alternatively use the navigation buttons in the PTZ Control section to move the selected PTZ or IPIX camera The round middle button lets you quickly move the camera to its home i e default position The plus and minus buttons lets you zoom in and out respectively PTZ Preset Positions If preset positions have been defined for the selected PTZ camera you are able to select such positions from the Presets list Selecting a preset position from the list will make the PTZ camera move to the specified position Preset positions are defined by the system administrator the Presets list will be empty if no preset positions have been defined for the selected PTZ camera IPIX PT
239. may have to click the expand icon in front of the name of the required device as well as the required main event to see the timer event Click OK to return to the Administrator window For system administrators defining actions to be triggered by events the timer event will now be selectable in line with other events defined on ProSight SMB OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 86 Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights Output e g lights sirens etc connected to cameras or other devices can be triggered manually when viewing live video in the Monitor as well as NetGuard and NetGuard EVS In the Monitor the output can be triggered by first selecting a camera for which manual output has been defined then clicking the Monitor s Output button which provides access to up to eight buttons representing the defined output Clicking the required button will trigger the output In NetGuard and NetGuard EVS the output is triggered by selecting the required output from a list on the client s Live tab The output does not necessarily have to be physically connected to the specific camera from which Monitor and NetGuard and NetGuard EVS view live video the output can be co
240. me window Tip When you select an output in the All Outputs list you can view detailed information about the selected output under Output Information in the lower part of the window OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 80 4 Click the gt gt button located between the All Outputs list and the On Motion Detected list This will copy the selected output to the On Motion Detected list To remove an output from the On Motion Detected list simply select the required output and click the lt lt button located between the All Outputs list and the On Motion Detected list How to Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights Events can be used for automatically triggering actions in ProSight SMB such as starting or stopping recording on cameras triggering e mail notifications making PTZ cameras move to specific preset positions activating output etc Several types of events exist see About Input Events amp Output In the following you will see how to define events based on input received from external input units such as sensors attached to doors windows etc connected to cameras or other devices on a ProSight SMB system To add an input based event do the f
241. mera name window by selecting the Enable iPIX check box and clicking the iPIX Settings button OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 41 IPIX View Adjustment The camera s IPIX functionality is configured by adjusting its IPIX view field indicated by a green ellipse in the preview image so it encloses the actual image area of the fish eye lens You do this by specifying a number of values which will be used by the IPIX technology for converting the elliptic image into an ordinary rectangular image You are able to set the ellipse s X radius Y radius X center and Y center either by specifying the required values directly in the four fields or by using the following buttons to adjust the ellipse Button Description R Decreases the radius of the IPIX view field The ellipse s horizontal X and vertical Y radiuses are changed at the same time keeping the aspect ratio R Increases the radius of the IPIX view field The ellipse s horizontal X and vertical Y radiuses are changed at the same time keeping the aspect ratio Rx Decreases the horizontal X radius of the ellipse Rx Increases the horizontal X radius of the ellipse Ry Decreases the vertical Y radius of the ellipse Ry Increases the vertical Y radius of the ell
242. mited to using camera images in a view you are able to use static images such as GIF or JPEG as well To use a static image in a view do the following on the Setup tab 1 Drag the System Overview section s Static Image link to the required position in the view 2 Release the mouse button over the required position When you release the mouse button the Choose File window opens letting you select the required static image file Using HTML Pages in Views In addition to viewing camera images and static images in a view you are able to import HTML pages and display them in the view This way you are able to include company web pages intranet pages navigation pages link collections etc together with the camera images in the view Tip When your imported HTML pages contain links it is recommended that links have the target blank attribute example lt a href otherwebpage htm target blank gt Link lt a gt This will make the links open in separate windows which will help you avoid losing view of NetGuard window itself due to a link opening a web page in the same browser window as NetGuard This however does not apply if using an imported HTML page for navigation between NetGuard s different views read more about this in Using an HTML Page for NetGuard Navigation To include an HTML page in a view do the following on the Setup tab 1 Drag the System Overview section s HTML Page link to the required position in the view When
243. more selected outputs will be triggered Note Use of features in the I O Control window requires that events and outputs have been specified see About Input Events amp Output The I O Control window Access You access the I O Control window from the Administrator window by clicking the I O Control button OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 78 Associating Events with Particular Outputs When associating an event with one or more outputs you are able to select between all outputs defined on the ProSight SMB system you are not limited to selecting outputs defined on a particular device To associate a particular event with a particular output do the following 1 Select the required event in the Available Events list in the left side of the I O Control window Tip Events as well as event buttons may be listed Tip When you select an event or event button in the Available Events list you can view detailed information about the selected event or event button under Event Information in the lower part of the window 2 Select the required output in the list of available outputs the list in the middle of the window 3 Click the gt gt button located below the Selected Outputs list This will copy the selected output to the Selected Outputs lis
244. mstances port 80 is used Tip The vast majority of NetGuard users will always log in to the same address and port number However if you occasionally log in to different addresses and ports or log in with different user names the Previous Logins list lets you select your previously specified logins in which case all you have to do is specify your password OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 172 2 Click the Login link After a short wait the NetGuard window will open NetGuard window has three tabs Live Browse and Setup The Live tab is used for viewing live images from cameras the Browse tab is used for browsing recorded images from cameras and the Setup tab is used for configuring NetGuard Note Depending on your user rights you may not be able to access all three tabs If You Log in for the First Time If you have logged in for the first time you need to determine whether any views exist Views determine how images from cameras are displayed in NetGuard and are thus required in order to be able to use NetGuard One or more views may already have been created for you or you may need to create views yourself Read more about views including how to determine if any views have already been created for you in Creating Views Logging in on Different Comp
245. n differences If selected detected motion will be highlighted in the camera s images when viewed in the Monitor Motion highlighted in green when viewed in Monitor Tip You are able to select the motion detection highlight color by clicking the Motion Color button in the Motion Detection Settings section Show Regions Installation dependent feature Available only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service this feature is not relevant See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences If selected areas in which motion detection has been disabled will be highlighted in the camera s images when viewed in the Monitor Default highlighting color is blue Tip You are able to change the color used to highlight areas with disabled motion detection by clicking the Region Color button in the Exclude Regions Settings section Area with disabled motion detection highlighted in red when viewed in Monitor OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 23 Default highlighting color is blue Update on motion only Installation dependent feature Available only when the recording server has been
246. n each menu section are described in the following Single View The Single View menu section is used for handling images from a single camera at a time The following features are available in the Single View menu section Feature Description Select Camera Lets you select a camera Selection is based either on a simple list of cameras or on a graphic representation of the ProSight SMB surveillance system s Monitor application When the graphic representation is used available cameras are indicated by green squares To select a camera click a green square The selected square will be highlighted and a still image from the selected camera will appear next to the menu Blue squares may appear Such blue squares simply indicate that no camera is available in the particular section of the ProSight SMB surveillance system s Monitor application Archives Non recent images are typically saved in so called archives The Archives link lets you select and view archived images from the selected camera provided such archives are available Image Lets you browse recorded images from the recent database of the selected camera image by image Clicking the left arrow will take you to the image preceding the currently viewed image unless the currently viewed image is the first stored image Clicking the right arrow will take you to the image following the currently viewed image unless the currently viewed image is the last stored image Tip
247. n is detected in images from the camera Tip This feature does not require that a VMD Video Motion Detection event has been defined for the camera in the I O Setup window To select an output for use when motion is detected in images from the camera 3 Select the required output in the All Outputs list in the left side of the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window Tip When you select an output in the All Outputs list you can view detailed information about the selected output under Output Information in the lower part of the window 4 Click the gt gt button located between the All Outputs list and the On Motion Detected list This will copy the selected output to the On Motion Detected list To remove an output from the On Motion Detected list simply select the required output and click the lt lt button located between the All Outputs list and the On Motion Detected list Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights Note The use of event notifications requires that at least one event has been specified for a device on your ProSight SMB system the event does not have to be specified for the particular camera You specify events in the I O Setup window accessed by clicking the I O Setup button in the Administrator window The Setup Notifications on Events window lets you select events for triggering event indications for the
248. n the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window 7 In the All Outputs list in the window s left side select the required output then click the gt gt button located between the All Outputs list and the On Manual Control list This will copy the selected output to the On Manual Control list which lists all outputs available for manual control when viewing live video from the camera in question Good to know You are not limited to selecting output connected to the camera itself If output has been defined on other cameras devices on the ProSight SMB system this output will also be selectable in the All Outputs list An unlimited number of outputs may be selected this way However due to space restrictions in the Monitor only the top eight outputs in the list will be available as output buttons in the Monitor In NetGuard and NetGuard EVS there are no such limitations If you have specified several outputs in the On Manual Control list you are able to control the sequence in which the outputs will be displayed in the Monitor as well as NetGuard and NetGuard EVS By using the up and down buttons located to the right of the list you can change OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 89 a selected output s position in the sequence The Outp
249. name of the device on which the output event is defined Output connected on Lets you edit which of the device s output ports the output is connected to Keep output for Lets you edit the amount of time for which the output should be applied Specify the required amount of time in either 1 10 seconds or seconds Example The output should be kept for five tenths of a second Note Some devices are only able to apply outputs for a relatively short time for example max five seconds Refer to the documentation for the device in question for exact information External output name Lets you edit the name of the output Note Output names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 72 Testing the Defined Output When you have defined settings for the output in question you are able to test the output by clicking the Test Output button Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The Advanced window lets you specify network settings to be used in connection with event handling The Advanced window Access You access the Advanced window by clicking the Advanced button in the I O Setup wind
250. nd views NetGuard s Setup tab lets you edit existing groups and views The Setup tab furthermore lets you adjust camera settings and set up joystick control for PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras Note Particular user rights may be required in order to access the Setup tab Your ability to edit groups and views also depends on your user rights Basically if you are able to create groups and views you are also able to edit them OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 177 Which Types of Groups are You Able to Edit Views in Depending on your user rights you may be able to create and edit views in the following types of groups Private and shared Private but not shared Shared but not private None at all To quickly determine which types of groups your user rights permit you to create and edit views in do the following 1 Select NetGuard Setup tab Note Particular user rights may be required in order to access the Setup tab If you are not able to access the Setup tab you are unable to create views 2 On the Setup tab look at the Views section The Group folders to which you do not have access will be indicated by padlock icons Consult your system administrator if in doubt about your user rights Using Static Images in Views You are not li
251. nded that you specify a path to a local drive If using a path to a network drive it will not be possible to save to the database should the network drive become unavailable Tip If you have several cameras and several local drives are available performance can be improved by distributing the databases of individual cameras across the local drives In case of database failure the following action should be taken Select which action to take if the database becomes corrupted The number of available actions depends on whether archiving has been enabled You enable archiving for a camera in the Archive setup window accessed from the Administrator window by clicking the Archive Setup button Repair Scan Delete if fails Default action If the database becomes corrupted two different repair methods will be attempted a fast repair and a thorough repair If both repair methods fail the contents of the database will be deleted Repair Delete if fails If the database becomes corrupted a fast repair will be attempted If the fast repair fails the contents of the database will be deleted Repair Archive if fails Available only if archiving is enabled for the camera If the database becomes corrupted a fast repair will be attempted If the fast repair fails the contents of the database will be archived This action is recommended if archiving is enabled for the camera Delete no repair If the datab
252. nding on their user rights not all users may have access to all cameras on the surveillance system Creating a Shared Group To create a shared group do the following on the Setup tab 1 In the Setup tab s Views section select the Shared folder or if you have created shared groups before any folder labeled Shared 2 In the Setup tab s Group Control section type a name for the group in the Group Name field then click the New button Tip Bear in mind that since the group is shared it will also appear in other users NetGuards therefore use a name which other users will immediately be able to understand Your new group will now appear in the Setup tab s Views section with the name you have specified and labeled as Shared You are now able to create a view within the group Creating a View in a Shared Group To create a view in a shared group make sure the group in which you want to create the view is selected in the Setup tab s Views section and do the following 3 In the Setup tab s View Control section type a name for the view in the View Name field Tip Bear in mind that since the view will appear in a shared group it will also appear in other users NetGuards therefore use a name which other users will immediately be able to understand 2 Click one of the View Control section s seven available New View layouts Your new view is automatically added to the selected group OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual
253. ndow s Log section OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 199 Stopping the Web Server To stop the Web Server click the ProSight SMB Web Server window s Stop server button This will stop the Web Server without shutting it down This means that you will quickly be able to start the Web Server again by clicking the Start server button Shutting Down the Web Server To shut down the Web Server click the ProSight SMB Web Server window s Shut down button This will shut down the Web Server and you will have to access it from Window s Start menu in order to start it again When clicking the Shut down button you will be asked to confirm that you want to shut down the Web Server RealtimeFeed Server Configuration The Realtime Feed Server does not require any configuration apart from its default image quality specified as part of the configuration of the Web Server You are however able to change the port number used by the Realtime Feed Server when communicating with the ActiveX Real Time Client default is port 9513 To change the port number do the following 1 Make sure the Realtime Feed Server is started see Starting the RealtimeFeed Server below 2 Access the Realtime Feed Server window by clicking the Realtime Feed Server icon in the notification are
254. nel OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 113 De interlacing Interlacing is a method determining how an image is refreshed when shown on a screen With interlacing the image is refreshed by first scanning every other line in the image then scanning every opposite line and so forth This allows for a faster refresh rate because less information must be processed during each scan However in some situations interlacing may cause flickering or the changes in only half of the image s lines for each scan may be noticeable If images from the selected camera are interlaced you are able to de interlace the image by viewing only odd or even lines in the image Zoom Controls With the zoom controls you are able to view areas of the selected image in greater magnification Use the large zoom in and zoom out buttons to find the required zoom level When you have zoomed in on an area of an image you are able to move around within the zoomed image by clicking the arrow buttons To quickly return to normal view of the selected image i e without zoom click the H i e home button Tip To move around within the zoomed image you may also simply click and drag the image in the required direction Smoothening and Scaling To digitally smoothen images from the camera select th
255. ng and pasting to one camera after the other Tip If you want to use a schedule for all cameras specify a schedule for one camera then use the Copy and Paste to All button to copy the schedule and paste it to all cameras in one go Copy and Paste to All Lets you copy the schedule displayed in the calendar section and paste it to all cameras in one go OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 51 General Settings Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The General Settings window lets you manage a variety of settings such as user rights e mail settings logging etc Access To access the General Settings window click the General Settings button in the Administrator window The General Settings window is divided into a number of sections Administrator Settings The Administrator Settings section lets you password protect access to the Administrator application and restrict user rights When the Enable Protection check box is selected users must supply the administrator password in order to be able to access the Administrator application and in order to be able to use any of the features to which access has been restricted Changing the Administrator
256. ng for each required event 1 In the Available Events list select the required event Tip You are not limited to events associated with a particular device You are able to select between all available events input events timer events event buttons from all cameras on the ProSight SMB surveillance system 2 Click the gt gt button to copy the selected event to the Active Events list When an event listed in the Active Events list occurs the event indicator will light up 3 Repeat for each required event OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 36 To remove an event from the Active Events list select the event in question and click the lt lt button Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights Available only when dealing with a PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom camera supporting PTZ preset positions the PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name Camera Name window lets you view and for many but not all PTZ cameras define preset positions for the PTZ camera Access To access the PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name Camera Name window click the PTZ Preset Positions button in the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window The button is only available if the
257. nnected to any device on your ProSight SMB system To add an output for manual control do the following Note In the following it is assumed that the required output unit has been connected to the output port on the required camera or other device but that it has not yet been defined on your ProSight SMB system If you have already defined the output on your system begin at step 5 1 In the Administrator window click the I O Setup button This will open the I O Setup window 2 In the I O Setup window first select the camera or other device to which the output unit is connected then click the Add new output event button This will open the Add New Output window 3 In the Add New Output window the External output connected to field will show the name of the selected camera or other device Now specify information in the following fields Output connected on Select the camera device output port on which the output unit is connected Many cameras devices only have a single output port in that case simply select Output 1 Keep output for Specify the amount of time for which the output should be active when triggered in either 1 10 seconds or seconds Note Some devices are only able to apply outputs for a relatively short time for example max five seconds Refer to the documentation for the device in question for exact information OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI
258. nt Once you have defined input events VMD events and outputs you are able to associate specific input events or VMD events with specific outputs in the I O Control window so that for example lights are switched on when a door is opened or when motion is detected on a camera Outputs may also be triggered by motion detection on a specific camera even without a defined VMD event or manually through output buttons in the Monitor application both are configured in the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window The I O Setup window Access You access the I O Setup window by clicking the I O Setup button in the Administrator window Note Before you specify inputs and outputs for a device verify that sensor operation is recognized by the device Most devices are capable of showing this in their configuration interfaces or via CGI script commands Also check ProSight SMB release notes to verify that input and output controlled operations are supported for the device and firmware used OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 63 I O Setup Window s Defined Events List and Buttons The I O Setup window features a Defined events list in which input output and VMD Video Motion Detection events defined for each device are listed The window furthermore
259. o onssi com www onssi com Page 181 The Joystick Buttons section lets you specify which joystick buttons should be used for particular actions To assign an action to a particular joystick button select the required action in the list then click the required joystick button When a button is assigned to an action the name of the button will be listed together with the name of the action To stop using a particular joystick button for a particular action select the button action in the list then click the Unselect button To free all joystick buttons from their associated actions click the Unselect All button You view live images on NetGuard s Live tab When you select NetGuard s Live tab NetGuard will connect to the ProSight SMB server and display live images from the cameras in the selected view Note Particular user rights may be required in order to access the Live tab In order to view live images in NetGuard the surveillance system s recording server must be running consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt Depending on your user rights access to viewing live images from some cameras may be restricted Selecting a View You are able to select a view for display on the Live tab in two ways By selecting the required view in the Live tab s Views section By selecting the required view from the Views list located in the upper part of the window Image Bars Each camera in the view is identified by an
260. obal event button select the Global entry at the top of the Defined Events list then click the Add new event button This will open the Add New Event window for adding event buttons in which you specify a name for the event button as well as whether the event button should trigger any e mail alerts when clicked When you click OK in the Add New Event window for adding event buttons your are returned to the Event Buttons window in which your new event button will appear in the Defined Events list Specifying Camera Specific Event Buttons To specify an event button for a specific camera select the required camera in the Defined Events list then click the Add new event button This will open the Add New Event window for adding event buttons in which you specify a name for the event button as well as whether the event button should trigger any e mail alerts when clicked When you click OK in the Add New Event window for adding event buttons your are returned to the Events window for specifying event buttons in which your new event button will appear in the Defined Events list Specifying Timer Events When you have specified an event button you are able to associate timer events with the event button OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 75 Timer events
261. ollowing 1 In the Administrator window click the I O Setup button This will open the I O Setup window 2 In the I O Setup window first select the camera or other device to which the input unit is connected then click the Add new event button This will open the Add New Event window Note Some cameras devices are capable of handling one input event only others are capable of handling several input events The content of the Add New Event window varies accordingly For simplicity reasons the following steps will describe adding an event on a camera device capable of handling one input event only 3 In the Add New Event window for devices capable of handling one input event only the External sensor connected to field will show the name of the selected camera or other device Now specify information in the following fields Sensor connected through Select the camera device input port on which the input unit is connected Some cameras devices only have a single input port in that case simply select Input 1 Event occurs when input goes Select whether the input event should be triggered when the signal on the input sensor rises High or falls Low External event name Specify a name for the event Note that event names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suff
262. olored zones and defined an image map area for each zone This way users will be able to simply click a zone in order to go to the view displaying cameras from that zone For instance the red zone on our image map mirrors the Go to Shared Group2 View2 button from the previous example When clicking inside the red zone users will go to View2 in Group2 Importing the HTML Page Importing a navigation HTML page into a view is in principle no different from importing any other type of HTML page into a view in NetGuard EVS The two important things to remember are The HTML page should be stored locally on the user s PC You should make sure HTML scripting is enabled on the HTML page when importing it To import the HTML page do the following 1 Go to NetGuard EVS s Setup tab 2 From the Setup tab s System Overview section drag the HTML Page link to the required position in the required view 3 This will open the Open URL dialog in which you specify the required HTML page 4 Having imported the HTML page select its position in the view and go to the Setup tab s Properties section 5 In the Properties section select Enable HTML Scripting Selecting Enable HTML Scripting ensures that the scripting required for your buttons or other navigation features to work is automatically inserted in the HTML page OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 1
263. om various collections of cameras In order to help you maintain an easy overview when you navigate between various views in your NetGuard EVS all views are placed in folders called groups A group can contain any number of views and if required subgroups OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 136 Difference between Private and Shared Views Views can be private or shared Private views can only be accessed by the user who created them Shared views allow many NetGuard EVS users to share the same views This is possible since all views are stored on the surveillance system server Depending on the type of surveillance system you connect to shared views can simply be shared by all NetGuard EVS users or access to selected shared views can be given to selected groups of NetGuard EVS users Before you create any views it is important that you are sure about the difference between private and shared views not least because a number of shared views may already exist in your organization If you already know that shared views exist and that you have access to them you can start using your NetGuard EVS straight away see Viewing Live Video and Viewing Recorded Video When you have access to shared views creating further views in your NetGuard EVS will not be nece
264. ometimes be similar the displayed schedule refers specifically to the selected camera Mode Select whether to add or delete periods in the calendar section Set Add periods May also be used to overwrite existing periods Clear Delete existing periods Online Check the Online box when you want to set or clear online periods for the selected camera E mail Check the E mail box when you want to set or clear periods with e mail alerts for the selected camera Such e mail alerts can automatically be sent to one or more recipients when motion is detected or specific events see About Input Events amp Output occur Note In order to be able to use e mail alerts the e mail alert feature must have been set up in the E Mail setup window Not applicable Not applicable Sound Installation dependent feature Available only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service this feature is not relevant See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences Check the Sound box when you want to set or clear periods with sound alerts for the selected camera in the Monitor application Note The Sound box is solely used when setting or clearing periods with sound alerts It cannot be used for scheduling audio recordings as audio recordings are not scheduled separa
265. on also lists the path to the archiving directory for each camera Tip If a particular camera is not listed it is highly likely that the camera is disabled To check if a camera is disabled look for the camera in the Administrator window s Device Manager section A disabled camera will be clearly indicated by an icon and can be enabled by right clicking the camera name Specifying that Archiving Should Apply for Specific Cameras To specify that archiving should apply for a specific camera select the check box next to the name of the required camera Specifying that archiving should apply for a specific camera Remember that only when you click OK is archiving actually enabled for the selected cameras Specifying Archiving Locations for Specific Cameras A default archiving location is specified for each camera The default archiving directory called Archives will be located at this location To specify another location for the archiving directory for a camera either click the browse icon next to the path listing for the required camera and browse to the required location or click the default path listing to overwrite it Overwriting an existing path Tip To maximize load sharing and optimize performance distribute archives across your available storage space if possible OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6
266. on in NetGuard EVS s top bar OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 169 NetGuard NetGuard provides remote users with feature rich access to the surveillance system It lets users access multiple servers at a time allowing remote user access across systems NetGuard may either be installed locally on the remote user s computer or it may be accessed through the internet and run from the ProSight SMB server Tip See system requirements for NetGuard under System Requirements What are Remote Users Able to do with NetGuard With NetGuard remote users are able to View live images from cameras on the surveillance system Browse recordings from cameras on the surveillance system Create and switch between an unlimited number of views each able to display images from up to 16 cameras from multiple servers at a time Views can placed in private groups only accessible by the user who created them or shared groups accessible by all NetGuard users connected to the ProSight SMB server Control PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom and IPIX 360 view cameras Activate external outputs Get quick overviews of sequences with detected motion Print images Generate and export evidence in AVI movie clip and JPEG still image formats
267. only possible to export the fisheye view itself not a flattened IPIX view a 2 2 split IPIX view or zoomed IPIX views Message texts may under particular circumstances appear in white letters across one or more of a view s camera positions Example of camera message text Possible messages listed alphabetically are After Database End Will appear on Browse tab only Indicates that the time selected is after the time of the last recording in the camera s database The last image in the camera s database will be shown in the camera position in order to indicate that recordings from the camera are available but only from a time earlier than the selected time Before Database Start Will appear on Browse tab only Indicates that the time selected is before the time of the first recording in the camera s database The first image in the camera s database will be shown in the camera position in order to indicate that recordings from the camera are available but only from a time later than the selected time Connected to Device Name Camera Name on IP Address Port Number Indicates that a connection to the camera has been established OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 166 Connecting to Device Name Camera Name on IP Address Port Numbe
268. or Opened and a stop event called Door Closed With a pre post buffer of three seconds images will be stored from three seconds before Door Opened occurs to three seconds after Door Closed occurs Note Pre post recording periods cannot be displayed in the timelines of NetGuard EVS s timeline browser The fact that these periods cannot be displayed in the timeline browser s timelines does not affect recording iPIX Note Functionality in the iPIX section is only available if the use of IPIX technology has been enabled for the device to which the camera is attached For dedicated IPIX cameras the use of IPIX technology is automatically enabled If not dealing with a dedicated IPIX camera you enable use of IPIX technology for a device in the Edit device settings window accessed by selecting the required device in the Administrator window s Device Manager section then clicking the Administrator window s Edit Device button The iPIX section contains the following fields and buttons Field Description Enable iPIX Select check box to enable the use of IPIX a technology that allows viewing of 360 degree panoramic images through an advanced fish eye lens on the particular camera iPIX Settings Opens the iPIX Camera Configuration window in which you configure the camera s IPIX functionality OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 84
269. ormation about the installation differences Provided the Web Server and the Realtime Feed Server are running on the ProSight SMB surveillance system remote users are able to connect to the surveillance system through a regular Microsoft Internet Explorer browser When accessing the surveillance system this way remote users will their access rights permitting be able to view live images from cameras on the surveillance system browse recorded images as well as generate and export AVI movie clips of recorded events OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 201 Remote users should be aware that a more advanced and feature rich way of accessing the surveillance system may be available Ask your ProSight SMB system administrator if it is possible to connect with a NetGuard or NetGuard EVS Logging in to the Surveillance System Note To log in to the surveillance system you must connect to a particular IP address and port number ask your ProSight SMB system administrator if in doubt about which IP address and port number to use Log in to the surveillance system the following way 1 Open a Microsoft Internet Explorer browser Microsoft Internet Explorer Version 6 0 or later is required Tip To find out which Microsoft Internet Explorer version you are using sel
270. orted HTML page work as intended 6 Enjoy simple and intuitive NetGuard navigation tailored to meet your organization s needs To log out of NetGuard simply click the Log Out button in NetGuard s top bar Log Out button Web and Realtime Feed Servers Installation dependent features Available only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service the Web Server and the Realtime Feed Server are not available See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences ProSight SMB features two alternatives to using the Image Server NetGuard NetGuard EVS for providing remote access to the surveillance system The Web Server and the Realtime Feed Server The Web Server and the Realtime Feed Server do not offer as advanced functionality as the Image Server NetGuard NetGuard EVS neither at the server end nor at the client end However if remote users are to access the surveillance system through very slow connections such as 28 8 Kbps connections using the Web Server and the Realtime Feed Server may be advisable The Web Server handles navigation and still image viewing whereas the Realtime Feed Server handles all live and playback feeds Remote users connect to the Web Server and the Realtime Feed Server through a regular browser no client software is required Both servers can be started fro
271. ot If the hot spot runs in a separate floating window you will see a HotSpot button in the Monitor s control panel When this is the case simply click the HotSpot button to open the separate hot spot window A hot spot in a separate floating window otherwise works just like a hot spot located inside the camera layout Tip The hot spot may also be used for point and click operations on some PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras Hot Spot with Carousel Depending on hot spot configuration in the Administrator application the hot spot may automatically display images from all cameras available in the camera layout one after the other with specified intervals This is known as a carousel When this feature has been enabled a Carousel button appears in the Monitor s control panel To toggle the carousel feature on and off simply click the Carousel button OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 100 Monitor s Control Panel The Monitor s control panel section contains a number of buttons for controlling the Monitor s features Button Description Viewer Opens the Viewer with which you are able to browse and play back recordings print images send images via e mail and export entire video and audio sequences in a variety of formats Note Use of the Viewer may requ
272. ount on some devices Leave the Autodetect Device option selected Click Next 5 When the device has been detected type the Device License Key DLK for the device in the DLK field Specifying DLK for the device Tip If you have imported DLKs see How to Import Device License Keys the DLK field will already be filled with the DLK for the device Click Next 6 Assign a unique and descriptive name to the device OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 15 Upon completion of the wizard the name will be used when listing devices and associated cameras in the Administrator window s Device Manager section The name may for example refer to the physical location of the camera s attached to the device Assigning a name to the device Tip You may click the Camera Setup button to access the Camera Settings for window in which you are able to specify certain settings related to camera name and PTZ control The latter requires that the camera is a PTZ Pan tilt Zoom camera 7 Click Finish 8 The device will be listed in the Administrator window s Device Manager section To view a list of cameras attached to the device click the plus sign next to the device name Tip Cameras are listed for each device with default names such as Camera 1 etc If you w
273. ovie clips and JPEGs still images Selecting a View You are able to select a view for display on the Browse tab in two ways By selecting the required view in the Browse tab s Views section By selecting the required view from the Views list located in the upper part of the window OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 184 Enlarging Images from Particular Cameras in a View To enlarge images from a particular camera in a view double click the blue title bar above the image Double clicking blue bar above image enlarges view To return to normal view simply double click the blue title bar again Tip If you have selected reduced image quality for the camera on the Setup tab images from the camera will be displayed in full quality when viewed enlarged Time Navigation The Browse tab s Time Navigation section provides you with controls for browsing and playing back recorded images from the camera selected in the view Master Time Area The Time Navigation section s Master Time area shows the master time and date of the recordings viewed The master time is the time to which all the cameras viewed are tied This means that when you browse recordings all the images you see in the view will in principle be from exactly the same point in time
274. ow Advanced Window s Fields The Advanced window contains the following fields Field Description Ftp Server Port Lets you specify port number to use for sending event information from the device to the surveillance system via FTP Default port is port 21 Alert Port Lets you specify port number to use for handling event based alerts Default port is port 1234 SMTP Port Lets you specify port number to use for sending event information from the device to the surveillance system via SMTP Default port is port 25 Polling Frequency 1 10 sec For a small number of devices primarily I O devices see Using Dedicated I O Devices it is necessary for the surveillance system to regularly check the state of the devices input ports in order to detect whether input has been received Such state checking at regular intervals is called polling The Polling Frequency field lets you specify the interval between state checks Interval is specified in tenths of a second Default value is 10 tenths of a second i e one second For I O devices it is highly recommended that the polling frequency is set to the lowest possible value one tenth of a second between state checks For information about which devices require polling see the release note OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com
275. ow By clicking the Administrator window s I O Setup button you open the I O Setup window in which you are able to specify each individual input event VMD event and output By clicking the Administrator window s Event Buttons button you open the Event Buttons window in which you are able to specify event buttons for manually triggering events controlled activity By clicking the Administrator window s I O Control button you open the I O Control window in which you are able to associate specific events with specific output This way you can for example specify that when motion is detected on a camera typically specified as a VMD event a siren should automatically sound output If you want users to be able to manually activate output when operating specific cameras you specify this in the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window Note Before you specify use of external input and output units on a device verify that sensor operation is recognized by the device Most devices are capable of showing this in their configuration interfaces or via CGI script commands Also check the OnSSI ProSight SMB release notes to verify that input and output controlled operations are supported for the device and firmware used Note If you are using several ProSight SMB servers in your surveillance solution setup input and output on a specific device should be defined on one of the servers only Do not define the same input or
276. ow s Calendar Section The Camera Alert Scheduler window s calendar section lets you specify exact periods of time for each option for each camera selected in the window s Camera list Set and Clear Modes Depending on your selection in the Mode list you Set or Clear periods in the calendar Your selection is indicated by your mouse pointer turning into either a pencil Set or an eraser Clear when inside the calendar section Mouse pointer turns into pencil Set or eraser Clear when inside calendar section Zoom Feature When placing your mouse pointer inside the day band in the top part of the calendar section you get access to the calendar s zoom feature With the zoom feature you are able to toggle between the calendar s default seven day view and a single day view The single day view provides you with five minute interval indications allowing you to specify periods precisely Calendar s zoom feature allows you to toggle between seven day and single day views OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 50 How to Set or Clear Periods in the Calendar To set or clear a period in the Camera Alert Scheduler window s calendar section simply click at the required start point in the calendar and drag to set clear a period depending on whether you have selected Se
277. p tab Camera Name The Camera Name field displays the name of the selected camera The field is read only Image Quality The Image Quality setting determines the quality of the images when viewed but also affects bandwidth usage If NetGuard EVS is used over the internet over a slow network connection or if for other reasons you need to limit bandwidth use image quality can be reduced on the server side by selecting e g Low or Medium Tip You can quickly reduce the bandwidth usage for all cameras in the view by reducing the image quality for a single camera then clicking the Apply To All button OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 147 Frame Rate Lets you select a frame rate for the selected camera Select between Unlimited default Medium or Low The effect of your selection can be illustrated by the following table Effect Unlimited Medium Low JPEG Send all frames Send every 4th frame Send every 20th frame MPEG IFrame Send all frames Send all frames Send all frames MPEG PFrame Send all frames Do not send any frames Do not send any frames Example If you set the Frame Rate option to Low in your NetGuard EVS and your surveillance system administrator has configured the camera to feed JPEG images at a frame rate of 20 frames
278. pe from list Tip ProSight SMB is able to automatically detect device type as well as serial number provided the IP address hostname and password of the device have been specified in the IP address DNS Host Name and Root Password fields Simply click the Detect Device button to auto detect device type and serial number Detect Device Click button to auto detect device type and serial number Note Use of the auto detect feature requires that the IP address and password of the device have been specified in the IP address and Root Password fields Device Name Name used to identify the device Tip To enable easy identification of devices it is often a good idea to use a device name that refers to the physical area covered by the cameras attached to the device examples Reception Area Car Park B Entrance Door Note Device names must be unique you cannot use the same name for several devices Camera Settings Opens the Camera Settings for Device Name window in which you are able to specify a number of settings for cameras attached to the device including Port through which PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras are controlled Camera names types and ports Note The number of settings available in the Camera Settings for Device Name window may be limited if cameras are not PTZ cameras or connected to a video server device Device Serial Number Serial number of device usually identical to the 12 ch
279. plication Joystick configuration control requires that a joystick is attached to the computer running ProSight SMB The Joystick Setup window OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 57 Access To access the Joystick Setup window click the Joystick Setup button in the General Settings window The Joystick Setup window is divided into two sections a Joystick Axes section and a Joystick Buttons section Joystick Axes Section The Joystick Axes section lets you configure the axes used for the joystick With a joystick you are able to navigate PTZ camera images three dimensionally along three axes an X axis a Y axis and a Z axis where the Z axis refers to the depth zoom level Example X Y and Z axes Button Check Box Description Invert y axis Lets you invert the Y axis This way you are able to select whether the PTZ camera should move up or down when you move the joystick towards you and away from you respectively z axis uses a relative positioning scheme Lets you specify whether the Z axis should use a relative or an absolute positioning scheme This will affect the way you zoom in and out with PTZ camera Default values Resets axes settings letting you use the joystick s default axes settings OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manua
280. port status bar Tip If you are exporting very long sequences export may depending on your selected export settings take a while You can continue to use NetGuard EVS for other purposes while the export process is underway If the Close On Completion check box is selected default the export dialog will automatically close when the export is finished Upon completion you are able to view and distribute the exported file OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 163 Example AVI file viewed in the Winamp player other common players include the Windows Media Player and the RealPlayer Exporting in Database Format To export video evidence in the surveillance system database format do the following Note Date and time formats used when browsing recorded images may vary depending on your computer s regional settings 1 Select NetGuard EVS s Browse tab 2 Select the view on which you want to base your export Tip You do not necessarily have to include all of the selected view s cameras in your export later in the process you will be able to specify exactly what to include in the export 3 In the Browse tab s Export section specify when the period to be covered by the export should start You do this by typing the required date in the first Start Time fi
281. quire administrator rights Installation dependent window Available only when the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service If the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application the Service Manager window is not available See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences The Service Manager window lets you pause resume the Recording Server service Pausing the service is necessary in order to access some features such as configuration of PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras Access You access the Service Manager window by clicking the Service Manager button in the Administrator window Note that the button is only available when the recording server has been installed as a service Pausing the Recording Server Service To pause the Recording Server service click the Pause button IMPORTANT While the service is paused no video or audio will be recorded OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 47 Resuming the Recording Server Service When the service is paused the Service Manager window closes The next time you open it the Pause button will have changed to Resume Simply click the Resume button to resume the Recording Server service Tip As a security measure
282. quire administrator rights The Add New Output window lets you specify the settings for an output on a device The Add New Output window OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 70 Note Before you specify output for a device verify that the output is supported by the device Most devices are capable of showing this in their configuration interfaces or via CGI script commands Also check the ProSight SMB release note to verify that output is supported for the device and firmware used Access You access the Add New Output window by selecting the required device and clicking the Add new output event button in the I O Setup window If the device does not support output the button will not be available Add New Output Window s Fields The Add New Output window contains the following fields Field Description External output connected to Read only field displaying the name of the device on which the output event is defined Output connected on Lets you select which of the device s output ports the output is connected to Many cameras only have a single output port in that case simply select Output 1 Keep output for Lets you specify the amount of time for which the output should be applied Specify the required amount of time in either 1 10 seconds o
283. r Indicates that a connection to the camera is currently being established Connection refused Reason Indicates that connecting to the camera in question is not allowed for example because your rights to access recordings from the camera have been changed by the surveillance system administrator Consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt Connection to Device Name Camera Name on IP Address Port Number lost Reconnecting Indicates that connection to the camera has been lost and that another connection attempt is currently being made Connection to engine failed Retrying Indicates that a connection to the surveillance system server could not be established and that another connection attempt is currently being made This message may occur if connection to the surveillance system is temporarily lost If your surveillance system consists of several interconnected servers the message may also occur if the server from which you are requesting the camera s recordings is temporarily unavailable If the problem persists consult your surveillance system administrator No images available for Device Name Camera Name on IP Address Port Number Database might be empty Will appear on Browse tab only Indicates that it is not possible to show images from the camera the very likely reason being that there are no recordings in the camera s database Bear in mind that the settings determining
284. r later is required on the computer running the ProSight SMB software and go to the following address http localhost 81 Note For remote users to view live images the Realtime Feed Server as well as the Monitor application must be running Web Server Administrator s Guide to Day to Day Operation Once it has been configured you are able to run the Web Server and remote users will be able to connect to it for image navigation and still image viewing Starting the Web Server The Web Server may already be running When the Web Server is running the Web Server icon appears in the notification area system tray at the far right of the Windows taskbar Web Server icon If the icon is not present you must start the Web Server To start the Web Server do the following 1 Open Windows Start menu 2 Select All Programs 3 Select ProSight SMB gt Web Server The Web Server icon now appears in the notification area system tray at the far right of the Windows taskbar Web Server icon 4 Click the Web Server icon This will open the ProSight SMB Web Server window If Auto Start was selected when configuring the Web Server the Web Server will automatically start and remote users are able to connect to it If Auto Start was not selected when configuring the Web Server the Web Server must be started manually by clicking the Start server button 5 Web Server and user activity can be monitored in the ProSight SMB Web Server wi
285. r seconds Example The output should be kept for five tenths of a second Note Some devices are only able to apply outputs for a relatively short time for example max five seconds Refer to the documentation for the device in question for exact information External output name Lets you specify a name for the output The name will appear on the button list with which users will be able to manually trigger the output Note Output names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 71 Testing the Defined Output When you have defined settings for the output in question you are able to test the output by clicking the Test Output button Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The Edit Output window lets you specify the settings for an output on a device The Edit Output window Access You access the Edit Output window by selecting the required output in the I O Setup window then clicking the Edit selected button Edit Output Window s Fields The Edit Output window contains the following fields Field Description External output connected to Read only field displaying the
286. r stopping recording on cameras triggering e mail notifications making PTZ cameras move to specific preset positions etc Events can also be used for activating output Output units can be attached to output ports on many devices allowing you to activate lights sirens etc from ProSight SMB Such external output can be activated automatically by events or manually from the Monitor application and NetGuard NetGuard EVS Types of Events You specify which types of input should generate which types of events Basically three types of events exist On many devices you are able to attach external input units to input ports on the device Events based on input from such external input units typically sensors attached to doors windows etc are called input events Some devices also have their own capabilities for detecting motion for detecting moving and or static objects etc typically configured in the devices own software in which case you are also able to use such detections from the device as input events Events may be based on ProSight SMB detecting motion on a camera Such events are called VMD i e Video Motion Detection events Finally events may be generated manually by users clicking custom made buttons in ProSight SMB Such buttons are called event buttons Specifying Input Events and Output In ProSight SMB your main entry point for configuration of input event and output handling is the Administrator wind
287. ra are viewed in the Monitor application Color changes only have effect in the Monitor application the default blue highlight color will always be used in the Administrator application OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 33 Access You access the Select Color window by clicking the Region Color button in the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window Note Highlighting of areas with disabled motion detection in the Monitor application requires that the Show Regions check box in the Camera Monitor Setup section of the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window is selected Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights In the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window you are able to associate a camera with particular external outputs defined in the I O Setup window for example the sounding of a siren or the switching on of lights The associated outputs can be triggered automatically when motion is detected as well as manually through output buttons available in the Monitor application NetGuard and NetGuard EVS The Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window Access You access the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Nam
288. ral cameras one after the other in a single camera spot a so called carousel View video from selected cameras in greater magnification and or higher quality in a designated hotspot Receive and send video through NetMatrix Include HTML pages and static images e g maps or photos in views Control PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom and IPIX 360 view cameras Use digital zoom on live as well as recorded video Activate manually triggered events Activate external outputs e g sirens or lights Use sound notifications for attracting attention to detected motion or events Get quick overviews of sequences with detected motion Get quick overviews of detected alerts or events Quickly search selected areas of video recordings for motion also known as smart search Skip gaps during playback of recordings Configure and use several different joysticks OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 132 Print images with optional comments Copy images for subsequent pasting into word processors e mail etc Export recordings e g for use as evidence in AVI movie clip JPEG still image and surveillance system database formats The database format can include audio Use pre configured as well as customizable keyboard shortcuts to speed up common actions
289. rce will automatically be presented when images from the camera are viewed Note that you are able to select an audio source attached to another device than the selected camera To associate an audio source with the selected camera simply select the required audio source from the list For cameras attached to the same device as an audio source the source is automatically selected and cannot be changed Image Storage Settings The Image storage settings section lets you specify when images received from the camera should be stored in the database You specify this information in the following fields Field Description When to store images in database Select when images received from the camera should be stored in the database Always Always store all received images in the database Never Never store any received images in the database Live images will be displayed but since no images are kept in the database users will not be able to browse images from the camera Conditionally Store received images in the database when certain conditions are met When you select this option specify required conditions in the following fields OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 24 On motion Available only when the option Conditionally is sele
290. re able to use e g the timeline browser or the playback controls to browse through recordings from around the specified point in time OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 110 Browsing Recordings with the Timeline Browser The timeline browser displays an overview of periods with recordings from all cameras displayed in your current camera layout The number of timelines displayed in the timeline browser reflects the number of cameras displayed in the camera layout you are viewing The timeline of the camera selected in the camera layout is highlighted Timeline browser displaying timelines for a camera layout with four cameras The timeline browser uses the following colors Red Recordings with motion Green Recordings without motion Black Periods without recordings Yellow Audio recordings The timeline browser s white horizontal line indicates the point in time from which recordings are being displayed in the camera layout The area between the timeline browser s two blue horizontal lines is a magnification of the 30 seconds preceding and following the point in time from which recordings are being displayed in the camera layout You are able to specify which time span 1 hour 2 hours or 12 hours should be used in the timeline and whether the newest
291. re features than the other Programming Differences Net or Not As opposed to NetGuard NetGuard EVS has been developed based on the Net software development platform Net Framework 2 0 downloadable from http www microsoft com downloads is required on computers running NetGuard EVS The Net software development platform allows the interconnection of computers and services for the exchange and combination of data and objects The platform makes extensive use of so called web services which provide the ability to use the web rather than single applications for various services This in turn provides the ability for centralized data storage as well as automated updating and synchronization of information The Net platform enhances software developers ability to create re usable and customizable modules which makes it possible to develop highly flexible software solutions You can therefore expect the Net based NetGuard EVS to be a highly flexible client ready for integration of new features plugins etc However organizations and their requirements are different and some organizations find that the high degree of interconnection of services and computers inherent in a Net based solution is not desirable If your organization has chosen to apply a conservative approach regarding Net based software using NetGuard will be the perfect solution for you Installation Differences NetGuard can be installed on the remote user s computer
292. recording server may be installed in two ways Either as an application the Monitor application or as a service the Recording Server service See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences The Image Server Handles access to the surveillance system for remote users logging in with NetGuard or NetGuard EVS The Image Server itself does not require separate hardware it runs as a service on the surveillance system server Surveillance system administrators handle Image Server configuration including remote users access rights through the Image Server Administrator application NetGuard and NetGuard EVS Choice of two types of remote access clients each providing users with intuitive remote access to the surveillance system NetGuard and NetGuard EVS let users view live images play back recorded images activate outputs print and export evidence etc NetGuard can be downloaded from the surveillance system server and installed locally on remote users PCs or the users can access it straight from the surveillance system server through an Internet Explorer browser The extra feature rich NetGuard EVS should always be downloaded and installed on remote users PCs The Web Server and Realtime Feed Server Simple alternatives to the Image Server NetGuard NetGuard EVS for providing remote access to the surveillance system the Web Server and Realtime Feed Server let system administrators manage remote acc
293. report print time as well as the specified operator s name and operator s note Installation dependent features The Viewer is only available from the Monitor when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service the features described in the following will not be available from the Monitor application See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences Note that if the Monitor application is not installed on your surveillance system you may still include a standalone version of the Viewer when exporting database content from NetGuard EVS including the Viewer in the export will provide recipients for example investigators police authorities etc with a convenient tool for browsing the exported database content To send evidence from the Viewer via e mail use the following procedure Note The e mail feature must be set up by the surveillance system administrator before you can use it Ask if in doubt Select the required camera in the camera layout see Using the Viewer and browse to the image you want to send via e mail Click the Send E mail Report icon The Send E mail Report icon This will open the E mail Report control panel The E mail Report control panel Type the e mail address of the recipient If sending to several recipients separate e mail addresses with a semicolon
294. required PTZ camera type from the list If no PTZ cameras are controlled through the COM1 port select None P T Z type controlled through COM2 Field available only if Some of the connected cameras are Pan Tilt Zoom cameras check box is selected If a PTZ camera is controlled through the COM2 port on the video server device select the required PTZ camera type from the list If no PTZ cameras are controlled through the COM2 port select None Camera List and Fields The camera list contains a line for each camera channel on the device First line from the top corresponds to camera channel 1 second line from the top corresponds to camera channel 2 etc To change camera settings select the required camera channel from the list specify required information in the following fields and click the Apply button OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 19 Field Description Camera Name Name used to identify the selected camera Existing names such as the default camera names Camera 1 Camera 2 etc can be changed by overwriting the existing names Note Camera names must be unique for each device Cam Number Users of NetGuard EVS can take advantage of a range of keyboard shortcuts some of which let the users toggle between viewing different cameras Such shortc
295. return to the original frame rate when the stop event occurs Remember to specify the required higher frame rate in the Desired speedup framerate fields Desired speedup framerate Available only if the Enable speedup check box is selected Specify required number of frames to be used when motion is detected and or an external event occurs in first field and select required unit per Second per Minute or per Hour from the list The frame rate must be higher than the frame rate specified in the Desired framerate field Example 16 frames per second Tip When you specify a frame rate the interval between images is automatically calculated and displayed to the right of the frame rate fields OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 22 Camera Monitor Setup In the Camera Monitor Setup section you are able to specify how images from the camera are displayed primarily when viewed in the Monitor application Field Description Show Motion Installation dependent feature Available only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service this feature is not relevant See Installing the Software for more information about the installatio
296. rify your settings with those recommended in the cameras manuals Camera Administration Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights Adding Cameras In ProSight SMB you do not have to worry about having to add individual cameras to the system OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 20 Cameras are connected to devices so once you have added the required devices to your ProSight SMB system see How to Add a Device all cameras connected to the devices are connected to the system as well Configuring Cameras You are able to specify a wide variety of settings for each camera connected to the ProSight SMB system Your entry point for such camera configuration is the Administrator window To configure a camera select the required camera in the Administrator window s Device Manager section then click the Administrator window s Settings button This will open the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window in which you have access to settings for the camera in question including How the camera should record frame rate image quality etc Where and when to store recorded images from the camera Motion detection sensitivity How images from
297. rights permit you to create and edit views in do the following Select any of NetGuard EVS s tabs Look at the Views section You are able to create and edit views under top level folders which are not marked by a padlock icon If a top level folder is marked by a padlock icon it is protected You can still use any views under the top level folder but you cannot create new views or edit existing views under it Consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt about your user rights Creating Private Views Note Views are created on NetGuard EVS s Setup tab Particular user rights may be required in order to access the Setup tab To create your first private view you first create a group under the Private top level group then create the required view within the group If you have created private views before you may create the new view in an existing group or you may create a new group for the view Creating a Group To create a group under the Private top level folder do the following on the Setup tab In the Setup tab s Views section select the Private top level folder Click the Create New Group button A new group is created The new group is simply named New Group Overwrite the default name New Group with a group name of your choice You are now able to create a view within the group Creating a View within the Group To create a view in a group do the following In the Setup tab s Views section make sure the group in
298. rnings may otherwise inform you that your e mail client is trying to automatically send e mail messages on your behalf The E mail setup window Access To access the E Mail setup window click the Email Settings button in the General Settings window OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 59 Enabling E Mail Alerts You enable the use of e mail alerts separately for the Monitor application or Recording Server depending on which has been installed and if applicable the Monitor application s Viewer feature Note When enabling e mail alerts also consider the e mail alert schedules configured for each camera in the Camera Alert Scheduler window Enable E Mail Monitor Recording Server Select check box to enable the use of e mail alerts when the Monitor application or Recording Server depending on what has been installed is running E mail alerts will then be sent when the following conditions apply o the Monitor or Recording Server is running o motion is detected or an event for which the sending of an e mail alert has been defined occurs o motion is detected or the event occurs within a period of time for which an e mail alert schedule has been defined Enable E Mail Viewer Installation dependent feature Available only when the recording
299. rveillance system supporting this feature being able to use this feature requires that notifications on events have been configured on the surveillance system server Consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt When images from the camera are viewed on the Live tab it is possible to get a simple sound alert when events related to the selected camera occur Always off Do not use sound alerts when events related to the camera occur Always on Play a sound alert each time an event related to the camera occurs What is an event An event is a predefined incident occurring on the surveillance system Depending on the surveillance system s configuration events may be caused by input from external sensors connected to cameras by detected motion by data received from other applications or manually through user input Events are used by the surveillance system for triggering actions Typically most events on the surveillance system are generated automatically For example detected motion can be defined as an event which in turn triggers an action such as recording on a camera Will I receive lots of sound notifications If you select Always on the amount of event related sound notifications you are likely to receive will depend on the nature and number of events related to the camera in question Events are configured on the surveillance system server consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt If you select so
300. s Timestamps arrow indicates actual position Date and time format may be different on your computer 8 This step applies for export in the AVI format only if using the JPEG format go to step 11 Select required frame rate for the export With the Full option all images between the start and end times will be included in the export with the Half option only every second image will be included yet still play back in real time 9 This step applies for export in the AVI format only if using the JPEG format go to step 11 In the AVI Codec list select required AVI codec The list will contain the video codecs available on your PC Tip A video codec is a particular compression decompression technology used when generating video files Your choice of codec will affect the quality and size of the AVI file The Indeo video 5 10 codec if available on your PC generally provides a very good compromise between quality and file size 10 This step applies for export in the AVI format only if using the JPEG format go to step 11 By default the AVI file will get a file name based on the export start time along the structure yyyymmddhhmmss avi year month day hour minute second example 20050630160430 for a file with a start time of 16 04 30 on 30th June 2005 The name will automatically appear in the AVI File Name field The default file name format is independent of regional settings on your computer You are always able to change the de
301. s Required HTML syntax Live tab lt input type button value Buttontext onclick SCS Application ShowLive gt Browse tab lt input type button value Buttontext onclick SCS Application ShowBrowse gt Setup tab lt input type button value Buttontext onclick SCS Application ShowSetup gt Tip For advanced users it is possible to create many other types of buttons using the approximately 100 different function calls available for NetGuard EVS See NetGuard EVS Scripting for more information In the following we have created two shared groups in NetGuard EVS We have called them Group1 and Group2 Each group contains two views called View1 and View2 We have also created an HTML page with buttons allowing users to switch between our four different views as well as between two of NetGuard EVS s tabs Live and Browse When viewed in a browser our HTML page looks like this OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 155 HTML page with buttons for navigating between views and tabs We have saved the HTML page locally in this case on the user s C drive When the HTML page is to be used for navigation saving the HTML page locally is necessary because of security features in Internet Explorer When saving the HTML page locally save it at a location to which
302. s HTML Page link to the required position in the view When you release the mouse button over the required position the Open URL window opens Open URL window In the Open URL window s Open field type the URL of the required HTML page example http www mywebsite com mywebpage htm or If the HTML page is stored locally on your computer specify its location on your computer example C myfiles mywebpage htm or click the Browse button to browse for the required HTML page Click the OK link Changing the Properties of an HTML Page Once an HTML page is added to a view you are able to change its properties by doing the following On the Setup tab select the imported HTML page in the view Properties of the selected HTML page will appear in the Setup tab s Properties section Change the required property Url Click the New button to specify a new URL or location of the required HTML page Scaling Select the required scaling of the HTML page The optimal scaling depends entirely on the content of the imported HTML page and how you want to display it As a rule of thumb with a high scaling value e g 1280 1024 text on the HTML page will appear relatively small and a considerable amount of content will be visible without OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Pag
303. s that the required authentication is Windows authentication current user If using Windows based authentication which should not necessarily be based on the currently logged in Windows user tell users that the required authentication is Windows authentication User name Only required if using Basic authentication or Windows authentication Remember that user names are case sensitive so make it clear to the users if any parts of their user names should specifically be upper or lower case Password Only required if using Basic authentication or Windows authentication Users with Basic authentication or Windows authentication will have the option of selecting Remember password which will help them speed up subsequent login procedures Inform users whether they are allowed to use this feature Auto login Users will have the option of selecting Auto login in which case NetGuard EVS will automatically start up and log in with the selected authentication method each time Windows is started for Basic authentication and Windows authentication this will require that Remember password is selected Inform users whether they are allowed to use this feature The Image Server s Define User Rights window lets you define access rights for NetGuard and NetGuard EVS users Access You access the Define User Rights window by clicking the User Access button in the ImageServer Administrator window The button is only available if you have selected the ImageServer
304. section lets you specify where to keep the general log files containing information about activity in the Administrator and recording server and how long for Separate log files are generated for the Administrator and recording server Furthermore separate types of recording server log files are generated depending on whether the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application or as a service the Recording Server service See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences Logfile Path By default the Administrator and recording server log files are stored in the folder containing the ProSight SMB software To specify another location for your log files type the path to the required folder in the Logfile Path field or click the browse button next to the field to browse to the required folder Days to Log A new log file is created every day A log file older than the number of days specified in the Days to log field is automatically deleted By default the log file will be stored for five days To specify another number of days simply overwrite the value in the Days to log field The current day s activity is always logged even with a value of 0 in the Days to log field The maximum number of days to log is 9999 Tip Read more about ProSight SMB logging in About Logging OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Su
305. selected images will not be stretched to fit the size of the camera position Rather images will be displayed with the aspect ratio with which they have been recorded This may result in horizontal or vertical black bars appearing around the images from some cameras If check box is cleared images will be stretched to fit the position in the view this may lead to slightly distorted images but you will avoid any black bars appearing around the images Example The same image viewed with Maintain Image Aspect Ratio selected left and cleared right Only Update Image on Motion If selected the camera s images will only be updated on NetGuard EVS s Live tab when motion is detected Depending on the camera s motion detection sensitivity configured on the surveillance system server this can help reduce CPU usage significantly If the camera s images are only updated on motion users will see the message No motion together with a still image in the camera s view position until motion is detected Sound on Motion Detection When images from the camera are viewed on the Live tab it is possible to get a simple sound notification when motion is detected Always off Do not use sound notifications on detected motion Always on Play a sound notification each time motion is detected on the camera Will I receive lots of sound notifications If you select Always on the amount of motion related sound notifications you are likely to rece
306. ser Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 104 PTZ Menu s Navigation Buttons The PTZ Menu s navigation buttons let you move the PTZ camera in steps Moves the PTZ camera up and to the left Moves the PTZ camera up Moves the PTZ camera up and to the right Moves the PTZ camera to the left Moves the PTZ camera to its home position Moves the PTZ camera to the right Moves the PTZ camera down and to the left Moves the PTZ camera down Moves the PTZ camera down and to the right PTZ Menu s Zoom Buttons and Slider With the PTZ Menu s zoom buttons you are able to control the zoom level of the PTZ camera Zoom out one zoom level per click Zoom in one zoom level per click As an alternative to using the zoom buttons use the slider located below the two zoom buttons to control the zoom level Note that the slider can be used only with absolute positioning PTZ cameras only PTZ Menu s Preset Position Buttons If preset positions have been defined in the Administrator application you are able to move the PTZ camera to the stored preset positions by clicking the preset position buttons displayed in the lower part of the PTZ menu Preset position buttons are grouped into five preset banks A E with up to five preset position buttons 1 5 in each To use preset positions f
307. server has been installed as an application the Monitorapplication If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service this feature is not relevant See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences Select check box to enable the use of e mail alerts in the Monitor application s Viewer feature In effect this will display the E Mail Report button in the Viewer s toolbar enabling users to send evidence via e mail If you clear the check box users will not see the E Mail Report button in the Viewer s toolbar Specifying Recipients You specify the e mail addresses to which e mail alerts should be sent in the Recipient s field If specifying more than one e mail address separate the e mail addresses with semicolons example aa aa aa bb bb bb cc cc cc Note If e mail alerts are enabled for the Viewer the content you specify in the Recipient s field will appear as the default value in the Viewer s dialog for sending evidence via e mail Users will be able to overwrite this default value Specifying Sender Settings Specify sender information in the following fields Sender e mail address Type the e mail address you wish to appear as the sender of the e mail alert Outgoing mail SMTP server name Type the name of the SMTP server which will be used for sending the e mail alerts Server requires login Select check box if a user name and password is required
308. splayed Alarm Overview icon By default the list shows motion sequences from the most recent database for the selected camera If you want to view a list of sequences from archived databases as well click the Alarm Overview control panel s Get All button Alarm Overview control panel In addition to listing motion sequences the Alarm Overview control panel can also display a list of occurred events the camera s event log To toggle between viewing a list of motion sequences and a list of occurred events click the Alarm Overview control panel s Sequences and Events buttons What to Do To view recordings from the time at which motion was detected or an event occurred select the required sequence event in the list When you select a sequence event in the list the camera layout will display images matching the exact time of the motion detection or event To view what took place prior to and after the motion detection or event use the timeline browser or playback controls to browse recordings from around the time of the motion detection or event Digital Image Control and Optimization With the Viewer s Image Controls control panel you are able to adjust the image selected in the camera layout The Image Controls control panel also lets you view areas of the selected image in greater magnification To access the Image Controls control panel click the Image Controls icon in the toolbar Image Controls icon Image Controls control pa
309. ss to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The Archive setup window lets you enable and configure the archiving feature in ProSight SMB It also lets you specify where archives should be stored for each camera Access To access the Archive setup window click the Archive Setup button in the Administrator window Archive Setup Window s Fields and Buttons The Archive setup window contains the following fields and buttons Field Button Description Enable Archiving Select check box to enable the archiving feature Note Remember to specify for which cameras the archiving feature should be used you do this in the Select cameras for which the archiving function should apply section Delete databases in the backup directory older than Lets you specify how many days you want to keep archived recordings for Archived recordings older than the specified number of days will automatically be deleted Send email on archive error Select check box if ProSight SMB should send an e mail alert if archiving fails for example because the disk is full Note In order to be able to use e mail alerts the e mail alert feature must have been set up in the E Mail setup window Daily archiving time To add an archiving time to the list specify the required time in the Time to add field then click the Add button OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual
310. ssary unless you want to supplement the shared views with private views of your own If you want to create views yourself for example if you do not have access to any shared views NetGuard EVS s Setup tab lets you create groups and views and specify which cameras should be included in each view see How to Create amp Manage Views Note The way shared views work varies slightly depending upon which type of surveillance system you connect to see Surveillance System Differences for details How to Check if Shared Views are Available Typically your surveillance system administrator will have told you if you have access to shared views Alternatively to quickly determine whether any shared views are available to you do the following Note This method requires that your user rights permit you to access NetGuard EVS s Live tab and or Browse tab Most users will have access to at least one of these tabs Go to NetGuard EVS s Live or Browse tab On the Live or Browse tab look at the Views section The Views section will always contain a top level folder called Private The Private top level folder is for accessing private views its content depends entirely upon which views if any you have created for yourself Any other top level folders in the Views section are for accessing shared views The names of such other top level folders depend entirely upon what has been configured on the surveillance system server The fact that the Views section
311. ssible camera settings click OK to apply the settings for the camera Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The Adjust Motion Detection window lets you specify motion detection sensitivity for a specific camera OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 30 Depending on your configuration motion detection sensitivity settings may determine when recordings from the camera are transferred to the surveillance system when alerts are generated when external outputs such as lights or sirens are triggered etc Motion detection sensitivity is therefore a key element in your ProSight SMB surveillance solution and time spent on finding the best possible motion detection settings for each camera may help you later avoid unnecessary alerts etc Depending on the physical location of the camera it may be a very good idea to test motion detection settings under different physical conditions day night windy calm weather etc The Adjust Motion Detection window Access You access the Adjust Motion Detection window by clicking the Motion Detection button in the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window Note Before you configure motion detection sensitivity for a cam
312. t When the selected event occurs or when the selected event button is clicked the selected output will be triggered You are able to associate an event or an event button with more than one output Simply repeat the process for each required output To remove an output from the Selected Outputs list simply select the required output and click the lt lt button located below the Selected Outputs list Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights In the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window you are able to associate a camera with particular external outputs defined in the I O Setup window for example the sounding of a siren or the switching on of lights The associated outputs can be triggered automatically when motion is detected as well as manually through output buttons available in the Monitor application NetGuard and NetGuard EVS The Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window Access You access the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window from the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window by clicking the Outputs button OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 79 Associating Outputs with Manual Control and
313. t contain any letters or special characters and must be no longer than eight digits Examples of correct camera shortcut numbers 3 12345678 Examples of incorrect camera shortcut numbers A 3 OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 43 123456789 It is highly recommended that you use a unique camera shortcut number for each camera Note Camera shortcut numbers are only used in NetGuard EVS In other applications such as the Monitor or NetGuard the camera shortcuts cannot be used Tip More information about using keyboard shortcuts in NetGuard EVS is available in Using Standard Keyboard Shortcuts Audio Source Administration Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The Audio Device Settings window lets you change basic settings for an audio source Access You access the Audio Device Settings window from the Administrator window Selecting an audio source in the Administrator window s Device Manager section then click the Settings button Field Check Box Description Device name Displays the name of the audio source If required you are able to overwrite the existing audio source name with a new one Enabled Lets you enable disable use of the audio source
314. t logging in About Logging Timeout for connections Lets you specify a number of minutes within which the remote user must have been active requested information from the Web Server in order to keep the connection open If the remote user has not been active within the specified time the connection will be closed and the remote user will have to log in again if more information is required from the Web Server Default period is five minutes Realtime feed quality Note This setting specifically concerns the RealtimeFeed Server Lets you specify the default image quality used by the RealtimeFeed Server Low Low image quality Recommended for slow connections such as modem connections Medium Medium image quality Recommended for connections of reasonable speed such as ISDN connections High High image quality Recommended for fast connections such as ADSL or LAN connections Remote users will be able to manually override the RealtimeFeed Server s default image quality OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 197 User Administration Accounts and access rights for remote users are configured in the Settings window s User Administration section Unrestricted anonymous remote access is possible however if you want to restrict remo
315. t names You are able to add up to 25 cameras If using video server devices on your system bear in mind that many video server devices can have more than one camera connected to them For example a fully used four port video server will count as four cameras Even though each device has its own IP address or host name several cameras can be attached to a single device and thus share the same IP address or host name This is typically the case with cameras attached to video server devices You can of course configure and use each camera individually even when several cameras are attached to a single device In addition to IP video camera devices and IP video server devices it is possible to add a number of dedicated I O input output devices to ProSight SMB When such I O devices are added they can be used in events based system setup in the same way as a camera For more information about using I O devices see Using Dedicated I O Devices For information about which I O devices are supported refer to the release note Once a device is added in ProSight SMB any cameras attached to the device are automatically recognized by the software and listed in the Administrator window s Device Manager section Detail from the Administrator window s Device Manager section two devices have been added the first device has a single camera attached whereas the second device has four cameras attached To add a device use the following procedure Prerequisit
316. t or Clear in the window s Mode list Good to Know when You Set Online Periods When you set an Online period you will be asked whether you want the selected camera to transfer images to the ProSight SMB software continuously within the specified period Always or only when an event occurs within the specified period On Event If using On Event remember to specify required start and stop events in the Start event and Stop event lists Colored Bars The calendar uses colored bars to indicate active periods for each option Online E mail etc In the Online bar active periods are indicated in either pink or yellow Pink indicates that the selected camera is continuously transferring images to the ProSight SMB software Yellow indicates that the selected camera transfers images to the ProSight SMB software when a specified event occurs In the E mail bar active periods are indicated in blue In the Sound bar active periods are indicated in red Camera Alerts Scheduler Window s Copy and Paste Buttons Button Description Copy Schedule Lets you copy the schedule displayed in the calendar section When used in combination with the Paste Schedule button you are able to quickly re use schedules from one camera to another Paste Schedule Lets you paste a copied schedule for use with the selected camera The same copied schedule can be pasted to several cameras simply by selecti
317. t the Tools menu then select Folder Options then the View tab Scroll to the bottom of the tab s Advanced Settings list and make sure that the Use simple files sharing Recommended check box is cleared When ready click OK and close the window Provided required users have been defined locally on the server and simple file sharing is disabled on the server you are able to add Windows users the following way In the User administration window click the Add Windows User button This will open the Select Users or Groups window Note that you will only be able to make selections from the local computer even if you click the Locations button In the Enter the object names to select box type the required user name s then use the Check Names feature to verify that the user name s you have entered are correct Note If typing several user names separate each name with a semicolon Example Brian Hannah Karen Sean When ready click OK The required users and will be imported and listed in the User administration window A user imported this way will appear as a Windows or Active Directory User in the list s Type column The user will furthermore be indicated by a user icon without the blue dot used for Basic users Example OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com P
318. tGuard EVS from Windows Start menu exactly how you do this is determined by where and how you have installed NetGuard EVS on your computer A splash screen is displayed while NetGuard EVS loads this typically takes a few seconds only NetGuard EVS login window appears Specify your login information in the following fields OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 133 Server address Type the URL or IP address specified by your surveillance system administrator Internet connections may use different ports for different purposes therefore the URL or IP address may include a port number example http 123 123 123 123 80 where 80 indicates the port number If you have logged in before you may simply select the required server from the Server address list Authentication Lets you select between different methods of authentication i e the process of verifying that you are who you claim you are Note Not all surveillance systems support the use of all three authentication methods Consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt about which authentication method to use Windows authentication current user with which you will be authenticated through your current Windows login and do not have to specify any user name or password This is NetGuard EVS s
319. tailed information about the functionality of PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name Camera Name window such as the ability to test your preset positions or the ability to combine preset positions with events see Preset Positions for Device Name Camera Name window s sections in the following You are able to define up to 50 preset positions PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name Camera Name Window s Sections Each of the PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name Camera Name window s sections are described in the following PTZ View Section The PTZ View section lets you control the PTZ camera and watch the PTZ camera s movements You use this section to move the PTZ camera to the positions you then define as presets positions in the Preset Positions section To move the PTZ camera simply click the required position in the preview picture The PTZ View section also features sliders allowing you to move the PTZ camera along each of its axes the X axis allowing you to pan left right the Y axis allowing you to tilt the camera up down and the Z axis enabling you to zoom in and out the camera will zoom in when you move the slider towards Tele and zoom out when you move the slider towards Wide As an alternative to clicking the required position in the preview or using the sliders you can use the PTZ camera navigation buttons Moves the PTZ camera up and to the left Moves the PTZ camera up Moves the PTZ camera up and to th
320. te access you must define user accounts i e user names and passwords for the remote users Defining User Accounts To define user names and passwords for remote users click the User setup button This will open the User administration window in which you define individual user names and their associated passwords To add a user click the User administration window s Add user button specify the required user name and password and click OK This will add the user to the User administration window s list of users To remove a user from the User administration window s list of users select the user in the list and click the Delete user button Defining Access Rights Three different types of access right are available Allow anonymous access Allows unrestricted access users will not have to specify a user name or password to access Access for predefined users only Allows access only to users you have defined by clicking the User setup button Those users must provide their user name and password when accessing after which they will have access to all available cameras Restrict user access by camera Allows access only to users you have defined by clicking the User setup button You are able to restrict those users access to particular cameras and features as described in the following Restricting Defined Users Access When you select the option Restrict user access by camera you are able to restrict defined users
321. te Group To create a view in a private group make sure the group in which you want to create the view is selected in the Setup tab s Views section and do the following 3 In the Setup tab s View Control section type a name for the view in the View Name field 2 Click one of the View Control section s seven available New View layouts Your new view is automatically added to the selected group Tip A group whether private or shared can contain an unlimited number of views More than one private and shared group can exist Adding Cameras to the View Having created a view within a group you are able to specify which cameras should be included in the view To add cameras to a view do the following 3 In the Setup tab s Views section select the required view When you select a view the layout of the selected view is outlined in the main section of NetGuard window 2 In the Setup tab s System Overview section click the plus sign next to the required server to view a list of available cameras 3 In the list select a camera and drag the camera to the required position in the view When you have dragged a camera to a position in the view the name of the camera will appear in the selected position You will not see images from the camera yet as the Setup tab is only for configuration not for viewing images Repeat for each camera required in the view OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc
322. tely If a device on your system supports audio recording audio is automatically recorded on the device s camera channel one when the camera is online Not applicable Not applicable Start event When you set an Online period you will be asked whether you want the selected camera to transfer images to the ProSight SMB software continuously within the specified period Always or only when an event occurs within the specified period On Event If using On Event the Start event list lets you select the required start event Note The use of event based online periods requires that events have been OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 49 defined Read more about events in About Input Events amp Output Stop event When you set an Online period you will be asked whether you want the selected camera to transfer images to the ProSight SMB software continuously within the specified period Always or only when an event occurs within the specified period On Event If using On Event the Stop event list lets you select the required stop event Note The use of event based online periods requires that events have been defined Read more about events in About Input Events amp Output Not applicable Not applicable Camera Alert Scheduler Wind
323. the Viewer button OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 107 The Viewer s Toolbar The Viewer s toolbar lets you quickly switch between the Viewer s different features Icons in the toolbar server as shortcuts to the features available from the File and Tools menus in the Viewer s menu bar When you select a feature in the toolbar settings for the feature typically become available in the Viewer s control panel located in the lower part of the window below the camera layout Depending on your rights not all of the following toolbar icons may be available to you Settings Opens the Viewer s Settings control panel in which you are able to specify settings for the camera layout and specify the time span for use in the timeline Single View Switches to a single enlarged view of images from the camera selected in the camera layout Tip You may also simply double click a camera in the camera layout to switch between single view and multi view Multi View Switches to multi view displaying all cameras in the selected camera layout view Tip You may also simply double click a camera in the camera layout to switch between single view and multi view Database Information Opens the Database Information control panel in which you select the cameras you want d
324. the camera should appear when displayed in the Monitor application Triggering of notifications and external output and more This also applies if you want to edit the settings for an already configured camera Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window lets you specify settings for a particular camera Example The Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window for a PTZ camera Access You are able to access the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window in two ways o From the Administrator window by selecting a camera in the Device Manager section then clicking the Settings button o From the Monitor Manager window by selecting the required camera then clicking the Settings button The Monitor Manager window is only available when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application The Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window contains the following sections and buttons OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 21 Framerate Settings The Framerate Settings section lets you specify the camera s recording speeds in the following fie
325. the hotspot is not in itself what makes the hotspot useful you can enlarge any image in a view by double clicking the image What makes the hotspot useful is that with a hot spot you can use a low image quality and or frame rate for cameras in the view s regular positions and a high image quality and or frame rate for the hot spot Then only when users select a camera for viewing in the hotspot will it be displayed in high quality and or high frame rate This can really help you save bandwidth on the remote connection Adding the Hotspot To add a hotspot to a view do the following on the Setup tab Drag the System Overview section s Hotspot link to the required position in the view Release the mouse button over the required position Tip Note that the position gets a thin orange border The orange border indicates that the position is used for a hotspot the orange border will also be evident when using the view on the Browse and Live tabs OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 144 Thin orange border indicates hotspot When the hotspot position is selected you are able to specify its properties in the Setup tab s Properties section Image Quality Select between Full default SuperHigh for megapixel High Medium or Low The setting will apply for all camer
326. the service is furthermore automatically resumed when you close the Administrator application Stopped Recording Server Service If the Service Manager window informs you that the recording server is stopped the Recording Server service has been stopped as opposed to paused outside the Administrator application Provided you have the required rights you will be able to start a stopped Recording Server service from Windows by selecting Start gt Control Panel gt Administrative Tools gt Services then right clicking Recording Server and selecting Start from the menu that appears Scheduling Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The Camera Alert Scheduler window lets you specify when each camera should be online A camera is online when it is transferring images to the ProSight SMB server for processing IMPORTANT The fact that a camera is online i e transferring images to the ProSight SMB server will not necessarily mean that images from the camera are recorded i e stored in the camera s database on the ProSight SMB server Image storage settings for individual cameras are specified in the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name Window You are able to specify whether cameras should be online within specific periods of time or whether they should start and stop transferring images when specific events occur within specific periods
327. tic reconnection is disabled Use of manual mode may require certain user rights See the description of the Admin Login button Stop or Start Available only when the Manual Mode button is depressed Stops the camera selected in the camera layout When stopped no images are transferred from the camera to ProSight SMB Tip In the camera layout the selected camera is indicated by a light blue image bar When the selected camera is stopped the button becomes a Start button Click the Start button to make the camera transfer images to ProSight SMB again OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 101 Start All Available only when the Manual Mode button is depressed Starts all cameras i e makes all cameras transfer images to ProSight SMB Stop All Available only when the Manual Mode button is depressed Stops all cameras When all cameras are stopped no images are transferred to ProSight SMB from any of the cameras Output Displays all available output buttons for the selected camera Output buttons are used for manually triggering external output for example for switching on lights sirens or similar When Output is selected Output button depressed any output buttons for the selected camera will be displayed below the Events button Simply click an output bu
328. time for the export and click the Start Time section s Set button Browse to the required stop time of the export and click the Stop Time section s Set button Select required Export Format click the Next button and follow one of the procedures described in the following Note that procedures vary depending on the selected export format Export format AVI file Select required Export Path if you keep the default setting the files will be exported to an Exported Images folder on your desktop Select required frame rate Full will export all images to the AVI file Half will reduce the size of the AVI file by only exporting every second image yet still play back in real time speed Select whether timestamps from the surveillance system should be added to the AVI file In the Codec list select the video codec compression decompression technology you want to use for generating the AVI file The Codec list only lists codecs supporting the resolution of the camera Tip If available the codecs Indeo Video 5 10 or Microsoft Video 1 are recommended Click the Next button to start the export Export format JPG WAV files Select required Export Path if you keep the default setting the files will be exported to an Exported Images folder on your desktop OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com
329. tion is running shut it down If the Recording Server service is running pause it by clicking the Administrator window s Service Manager button then clicking the Pause button IMPORTANT No video or audio will be recorded while the Monitor application is shut down or the Recording Server service is paused Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights Note Settings in the Configure Device window are to a large extent camera specific The window s contents will therefore vary from camera to camera descriptions in the following are thus for guidance only The Configure Device window lets you specify image quality settings such as compression resolution etc for a specific camera OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 29 Example of the Configure Device window with a preview image Access You access the Configure Device window by clicking the Image Quality button in the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window The Configure Device window is divided into a Camera Settings section and a preview image section Camera Settings Section The Camera Settings section will typically contain controls for compression bandwidth resolution color contrast brightn
330. to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights Timer events are separate events triggered by the input event VMD event or event button under which they are defined Timer events occur a specified number of seconds or minutes after the event under which they are defined has occurred or the event button under which they have been defined has been clicked Timer events may be used for a wide variety of purposes the following are examples only A camera starts recording based on an input event e g when a door is opened a timer event stops the recording after 15 seconds Lights are switched on and a camera starts recording based on a VMD event i e when motion is detected a timer event stops the recording after one minute and another timer event switches the lights off after two minutes To define a timer event do the following 1 A timer event requires that an input event VMD event or event button has already been defined Begin by selecting the required event or event button If Adding the Timer Event under an Already Defined Input or VMD Event Click the Administrator window s I O Setup button to open the I O Setup window In the I O Setup window s Defined events list click the plus sign next to the required device select the required input or VMD event then click the Add new event button to open the New Timer OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manua
331. to meet your organization s needs For advanced users it is possible to create function calls in NetGuard EVS Note that the use of scripting will require some familiarity with programming Viewing a List of Possible Function Calls To view a list of the approximately 100 different function calls you are able to use in NetGuard EVS do the following on NetGuard EVS s Setup tab 1 Drag the System Overview section s HTML Page link to a position in a view Tip Preferably use a 1 1 view this will give you the best possible overview of the list s content When you release the mouse button over the required position the Open URL window opens Open URL window 2 In the Open URL window s Open field type about script and click OK This will display the list of function calls Each function call will be listed with a short description of its purpose and you will be able to try out many of the function calls straight from the list OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 158 Startup Scripting It is possible to use scripting to control parts or all of NetGuard EVS login procedure Examples If using the authentication methods Basic authentication or Windows authentication you can make NetGuard EVS login dialog open with pre filled Server address and User name fi
332. to open the Define User Rights window in which you define access rights for each user OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 125 Log Files Section In the Log Files section specify the number of days to keep log files in the Image Server s regular event log By default such log files are kept for ten days before they are deleted Tip Read more about ProSight SMB logging in About Logging Audit Log Section Audit logging is the logging of NetGuard and NetGuard EVS user actions If this type of logging is required select the Enable Audit Logging check box When audit logging is enabled you are able to specify the following values Days to log Number of days in which audit log files should be kept before they are overwritten Default is 30 days If you specify 0 zero audit log files will be kept indefinitely disk storage space permitting Minimum Logging Interval Minimum number of seconds between logged events Specifying a high number of seconds between logged events may help reduce the size of the audit log Default is 60 seconds In Sequence Timespan Maximum number of seconds to pass for viewed images to be considered to be within the same sequence Specifying a high number of seconds may thus help limit the number of viewed sequences
333. tputs list and the On Manual Control list This will copy the selected output to the On Manual Control list Note An unlimited number of outputs may be selected this way but only the top eight outputs in the list will be available as output buttons in the Monitor In NetGuard and NetGuard EVS there are no limitations to the number of available outputs You are able to determine each output s position among the Monitor s output buttons or NetGuard s and NetGuard EVS s output list by moving the selected output up or down in the On Manual Control list with the up and down buttons located to the right of the list The selected output is moved up one step each time you click the up button Likewise each time you click the down button the selected output is moved down one step To remove an output from the On Manual Control list simply select the required output and click the lt lt button located between the All Outputs list and the On Manual Control list Selecting Output for Use on Motion Detection You are able to select outputs to be triggered automatically when motion is detected in images from the camera Tip This feature does not require that a VMD Video Motion Detection event has been defined for the camera in the I O Setup window To select an output for use when motion is detected in images from the camera 3 Select the required output in the All Outputs list in the left side of the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Na
334. trator if in doubt about using event buttons defined for use with cameras in your organization Quick Browse Available only when a hot spot is enabled Quick Browse lets you browse images from the selected camera in the hot spot Use the back and forward buttons below the Quick Browse button to move backwards and forwards Tip The Viewer offers more advanced browsing features Note Use of the Quick Browse feature may require certain user rights See the description of the Admin Login button Mute Audio Lets you mute audio from cameras on which audio is enabled Recording is not affected by muting audio in the Monitor Admin Login For users without administrator rights access to certain features in ProSight SMB may in some organizations have been restricted Provided you know the administrator password the Admin Login button lets you access such protected features Clicking the Admin Login button opens the Administrator Login window in which you are able to specify the administrator password and log in to ProSight SMB as an administrator When you are logged in as an administrator the Admin Login button changes to Admin Logout Clicking the Admin Logout button will restore any restrictions Administrator Lets you access the Administrator application The Administrator application is used for configuring ProSight SMB upon installation or whenever configuration adjustments are required e g when adding new cameras to the system Not
335. ts can be associated with the clicking of an event button you do this in the I O Control window For triggering event based e mail alerts In combinations For example the clicking of an event button could make a camera start transferring images to the surveillance system while two outputs are triggered and an e mail alert is sent to relevant people Event buttons can be global available for all cameras included in the Monitor or tied to a particular camera only available when the camera is selected in the Monitor Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The Event Buttons window lets you specify buttons for manually triggering events controlled activity When specified event buttons become available in the Monitor application and NetGuard EVS in NetGuard EVS event buttons are actually not buttons instead users manually trigger events by selecting them from a list Event buttons can be global available for all cameras in the Monitor or tied to a particular camera only available when the camera is selected in the Monitor The Event Buttons window Access You access the Event Buttons window by clicking the Event Buttons button in the Administrator window OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711
336. tton to trigger the associated output Example of output buttons Up to eight output buttons can be displayed for each camera Output buttons are defined in the Administrator application Ask your system administrator if in doubt about using output buttons defined for use with cameras in your organization Events Displays all available event buttons for the selected camera Depending on configuration event buttons can be used for a wide variety of purposes including triggering combinations of actions For example the clicking of an event button could make a camera use a higher frame rate trigger two different outputs and send an e mail alert to three different recipients Event buttons can be global available for all cameras in the Monitor or tied to a particular camera only available when the camera is selected in the Monitor When Events is selected Events button depressed any global event buttons as well as any event buttons for the selected camera will be displayed below the Events button Simply click an event button to trigger the associated event OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 102 Example of event buttons Up to eight event buttons can be displayed for each camera Event buttons are defined in the Administrator application Ask your system adminis
337. ttons to reflect this by selecting the Ceiling Mount check box Setting a View as Home Position When previewing the IPIX rendered view you are able to set a particular position in the IPIX rendered view as the camera s PTZ home position Navigate to the required position using the navigation buttons then click the Set View as Home Position button Image Resolution Image resolution values are automatically displayed in the lower part of the window next to the navigation buttons When using IPIX image resolution will automatically be set to the highest available resolution The Camera Name and Number window lets you edit the name of a selected camera and if required assign a shortcut number to the selected camera Access You access the Camera Name and Number window from the Administrator window s device Manager section Right click the name of the required camera then select Edit from the menu that appears The Camera Name and Number window contains two fields Field Description Camera Name Displays the name of the camera If required you are able to overwrite the existing camera name with a new one Camera Number Users of NetGuard EVS can take advantage of a range of keyboard shortcuts some of which let the users toggle between viewing different cameras Such shortcuts include numbers which are used to identify each camera Each camera s shortcut number is specified in the Cam Number field A camera shortcut number must no
338. ual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 208 Integrity Checks and Possible Error Messages Log files are subjected to an integrity check once every 24 hours The result of the integrity check is automatically written to a file named according to the structure LogCheck_YYYYMMDD log e g LogCheck_20070615 log The log check file is by default placed in the folder containing the ProSight SMB software Any inconsistencies will be reported in the form of error messages written in the log check file The following table lists possible error messages other non error messages may also appear in the log check file Error Message Description Log integrity information was not found Log integrity can t be guaranteed The log file could not be checked for integrity Log information does not match integrity information Log integrity can t be guaranteed The log file exists but does not contain the expected information Thus log integrity cannot be guaranteed Log file name not found The log file was not present Log file name is empty The log file was present but empty Last line changed removed in log file name The last line of the log file did not match validation criteria Encrypted data missing in log file name near line The
339. uences button Clicking the Get Sequences button will retrieve a list of up to 40 sequences 20 sequences prior to the point in time displayed in the view and 20 sequences following the point in time displayed in the view Each sequence will be listed with date and time as well as the length of the sequence Clicking a sequence in the list will move all images in the view to the time of the sequence If the Preview check box is selected you are able to quickly view each sequence by placing the mouse pointer over the required sequence in the list Clicking the expand icon next to a sequence in the list will show you the exact date and time of the first and last image in the sequence as well as the exact date and time of the motion detection event etc triggering the recording Sequences may often begin some seconds before a motion detection event etc and end some seconds after This so called buffer allows you to be able to see what happens immediately before and after an incident the buffer length is determined by the system administrator Expanded sequence indication Date and time format may be different on your computer PTZ Control The Browse tab s PTZ Control section lets you navigate recorded images from IPIX cameras IPIX is a technology allowing creation and viewing of 360 degree panoramic images Note The Browse tab s PTZ Control section cannot be used for controlling PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras as the Browse tab is used for vie
340. und notifications for more than one camera you may also hear more notifications again depending on the surveillance system s event configuration Tip By default NetGuard EVS uses a simple sound file for its sound notifications The sound file called Notification wav is located in NetGuard EVS installation folder If you want to use another wav file as your notification sound simply name the required file Notification wav and place it in NetGuard EVS installation folder instead of the original file The file Notification wav is used for event as well as motion detection notifications it is not possible to use different sound files for different cameras or to distinguish between event and motion detection notifications OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 150 Apply to All The Apply To All button lets you quickly apply the camera settings for the selected camera to all cameras in the view Note Even though joystick control is supported for a large number of PTZ cameras not all PTZ cameras may be joystick controlled Refer to the release note for information about joystick support for cameras When a new joystick is detected by NetGuard EVS a default PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom configuration for the joystick is added automatically However you are able to customize the
341. up to move automatically when particular events occur PTZ On Event This is configured in the Administrator application With PTZ On Event the PTZ camera will automatically move to a particular preset position when a particular event occurs For example the PTZ camera may move to a preset position covering a door area when a door is opened Note PTZ On Event is stopped for all cameras as long as Manual Mode is used to allow cameras to be controlled manually PTZ cameras may be set up to move automatically when particular events occur PTZ On Event This is configured in the Administrator application With PTZ On Event the PTZ camera will automatically move to a particular preset position when a particular event occurs For example the PTZ camera may move to a preset position covering a door area when a door is opened Note PTZ On Event is stopped for all cameras as long as Manual Mode is used to allow cameras to be controlled manually PTZ cameras may be set up to move automatically when particular events occur PTZ On Event This is configured in the Administrator application With PTZ On Event the PTZ camera will automatically move to a particular preset position when a particular event occurs For example the PTZ camera may move to a preset position covering a door area when a door is opened Note PTZ On Event is stopped for all cameras as long as Manual Mode is used to allow cameras to be controlled manually PTZ cameras ma
342. ut Settings for Device Name Camera Name window also lets you select output for automatic triggering on detected motion This is further described in How to Add a Motion Triggered Output 8 When ready click the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window s Exit button to return to the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window 9 In the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window click OK to return to the Administrator window 10 Close the Administrator The defined output will now be available in the Monitor and NetGuard NetGuard EVS as described in the beginning of this text Note that individual users rights may prevent them from accessing specific cameras and or output in NetGuard NetGuard EVS such rights are defined through the ImageServer Administrator window Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights Output e g lights sirens etc connected to cameras or other devices can be triggered automatically when motion is detected by a camera The output does not necessarily have to be physically connected to the motion detecting camera To add a motion triggered output do the following Note The following describes one way of adding a motion triggered output namely through the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window Alternatively motion triggered output may be based on VMD events or if a
343. uters Your user settings are stored on the ProSight SMB server This means that your login can be used on any computer that has a NetGuard installed The way in which images from one or more cameras are displayed in NetGuard is called a view A view may contain images from up to 16 cameras A NetGuard can handle an unlimited number of views allowing you to switch between various collections of camera images In order to help you maintain an easy overview when you navigate between various views in your NetGuard all views are placed in folders called groups A group can contain any number of views Groups in turn can be private or shared Views placed in private groups can only be accessed by the user who created them whereas views placed in shared groups can be accessed by all NetGuard users connected to the ProSight SMB server Simplified example of views in private and shared groups Before you create any views it is important that you know the difference between views placed in shared and private groups not least because a number of views may already have been created and placed in shared groups for NetGuard users in your organization When that is the case you can start using your NetGuard straight away creating further views in your NetGuard will not be necessary unless you want to supplement the views in the shared groups with views of your own placed in private groups If you want to create views yourself for example if no views in share
344. uts include numbers which are used to identify each camera Each camera s shortcut number is specified in the Cam Number field A camera shortcut number must not contain any letters or special characters and must be no longer than eight digits Examples of correct camera shortcut numbers 3 12345678 Examples of incorrect camera shortcut numbers A 3 123456789 It is highly recommended that you use a unique camera shortcut number for each camera Note Camera shortcut numbers are only used in NetGuard EVS In other applications such as the Monitor or NetGuard the camera shortcuts cannot be used Tip You can also assign shortcut numbers to cameras in the Camera Name and Number window Tip More information about using keyboard shortcuts in NetGuard EVS is available in Using Standard Keyboard Shortcuts Camera Type Lets you select whether the camera on the selected camera channel is Fixed or Moveable Fixed Camera mounted in a fixed position Moveable PTZ camera Device Port Available only if Moveable is selected in the Camera Type field Lets you select which control port on the video server should be used for controlling PTZ functionality on the camera Port Address Available only if Moveable is selected in the Camera Type field Lets you specify port address of the camera The port address would normally be 0 or 1 If using daisy chained PTZ cameras the port address will identify each of them and you should ve
345. vent occurs check box is selected Select check box to include an image recorded at the time the input event is triggered in the e mail alert then select the required camera in the list next to the check box Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The New Timer window lets you specify the settings for timer events Timer events are separate events triggered by the input event VMD event or event button under which they are defined Timer events occur a specified number of seconds or minutes after the event under which they are defined has occurred or the event button under which they have been defined has been clicked Timer events may be used for a wide variety of purposes the following are examples only A camera starts recording based on an input event e g when a door is opened a timer event stops the recording after 15 seconds Lights are switched on and a camera starts recording based on a VMD event i e when motion is detected a timer event stops the recording after one minute and another timer event switches the lights off after two minutes OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 69 The New Timer window Access You are able to access the New Timer
346. ver recording will be affected Consult your surveillance system administrator The server has encountered a database problem Indicates that a database problem has occurred on the surveillance server Consult your surveillance system administrator who will have access to tools for diagnosing surveillance server database problems The server has lost connection to the camera Indicates that the surveillance server has lost connection to the camera This may be a temporary issue for example due to maintenance Consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt NetGuard EVS supports use of multiple windows when connected to selected surveillance systems This is especially useful if your computer has more than one physical display attached but even when your computer has only one display you can send individual views to separate windows while keeping NetGuard EVS s main window in the background This way you can watch more than one view at a time You can send views to separate displays or windows from NetGuard EVS s Live tab as well as its Browse tab Sending a View to Primary Display OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 167 Sending a view to Primary Display will show the view in a separate full screen window on your computer s main display Examp
347. vices capable of handling several input events It lets you define which of the device s possible input events should be enabled and whether any alerts should be associated with enabled input events The Multiple Input Events window Note Before you specify input events for a device verify that sensor operation is recognized by the device Most devices are capable of showing this in their configuration interfaces or via CGI script commands Also check ProSight SMB release notes to verify that input and output controlled operations are supported for the device and firmware used Access You access the Multiple Input Events window by clicking the Add new event button in the I O Setup window Note that this only applies when the device selected in the I O Setup window is capable of handling several input events Some devices are capable of handling a single input event only in which case a different window the Add New Event window for devices capable of handling one input event only will open when the Add new event button is clicked Multiple Input Events Window s Fields and Buttons The Multiple Input Events window contains the following fields and buttons Field Description Input events for device Read only field displaying the name of the device on which the input events are defined Available Input Event s Lists available input events for the device typically with an input event for rising and falling signals on eac
348. wed image A time stamp will automatically be included with the print You are furthermore able to include your name and a comment if required Go To Lets you jump straight to images from a date and time specified in the field above the Go To button Quad View The Quad View menu section is used for viewing live images from up to four cameras at a time Example of quad view You are able to create and save up to ten different quad views To save a quad view click the Save Setup link at the top of the quad view in question Tip You are able to give each saved quad view a name of your choice Type the required name in the Quad field at the top of the quad view in question then click the Save Setup link OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 206 Logging Various types of log files can be generated by ProSight SMB Log File Types Locations and Names ProSight SMB is able to generate the following types of log files Administrator Application Log Files These files log activity in the Administrator application A log file is created for each day the Administrator is used Administrator log files are by default placed in the folder containing the ProSight SMB software Note however that the location as well as the number of days to log can be changed in
349. window in three ways If dealing with input and VMD events in the I O Setup window When you click the plus sign next to a device in the window s Defined events list and select a defined event you are able to click the Add new event button to access the New Timer window If dealing with event buttons in the Event Buttons window When selecting an already specified event button in the Defined Events list you are able to click the Add new event button to access the New Timer window New Timer Window s Fields The New Timer window contains the following fields Field Description Timer event is started by Read only field displaying the name of the event or event button under which the timer event is defined Timer event name Lets you specify a name for the timer event Note Event names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp Timer event occurs after Lets you specify the amount of time that should pass between the event occurring event button being clicked and the timer event Specify the required amount of time in either seconds or minutes Examples The timer event should occur 15 seconds after the event under which it is defined has occurred The timer event should occur 2 minutes after the event button under which it has been defined has been clicked Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may re
350. wing may require administrator rights Available only when dealing with a PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom camera the Event window for preset positions on events lets you associate particular preset positions with particular events timer events or event buttons You are thus able to make the PTZ camera automatically go to a particular preset position when a particular event occurs The Event window for preset positions on events Access To access the Event window for preset positions on events click the Setup button in Preset Position on Events section of the PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name Camera Name window OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 40 Note To use preset positions on events you must have specified input or VMD events or event buttons Only one PTZ preset position can be defined per event per camera Associating Preset Positions with Particular Events When associating a preset position from a particular PTZ camera with one or more events you are able to select between all events defined on the ProSight SMB system you are not limited to selecting events defined on a particular device To associate a particular preset position with a particular event do the following 1 Select the required preset position in the Available Preset Positions list
351. wing already recorded images Point and Click Control Many IPIX cameras may be controlled simply by pointing and clicking inside the images from the camera If you see a set of crosshairs when placing your mouse pointer over the images from an IPIX camera point and click control is supported for the camera Refer to the release note for information about point and click support PTZ Navigation Buttons As an alternative to point and click IPIX control use the navigation buttons in the PTZ Control section to move around the view from the selected IPIX camera The round middle button lets you quickly move the camera to its home i e default position The plus and minus buttons lets you zoom in and out respectively PTZ Preset Positions The Presets list does not apply for navigating recorded images from IPIX cameras IPIX PTZ Preset Positions You are able to move to a specific position in the IPIX view and then save that position by clicking the Save button When you later want to return to the saved position click the Load button OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 187 Printing Images With the Browse tab s Print section you are able to print recorded images To print an image do the following 1 Select the required camera from the Print section s Source
352. with lots of motion a VMD event cannot occur more frequently than every five seconds To add a VMD event do the following 1 In the Administrator window click the I O Setup button This will open the I O Setup window 2 In the I O Setup window first select the device on which motion must be detected in order for the event to occur then click the Add VMD Event Motion Detection button This will automatically add a VMD event to the selected device unless the selected device is a video server see below o If the selected device is a video server several cameras may be attached to the device and a separate dialog will prompt you to select the required camera OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 84 When ready click OK 3 In the I O Setup window your newly defined VMD event will now be listed you may have to click the expand icon in front of the name of the device to see the listing Click OK to close the I O Setup window and return to the Administrator window For system administrators defining actions to be triggered by events the VMD event will now be selectable in line with other events defined on ProSight SMB Tip For video server devices you are able to define a VMD event for each connected camera simply repeat above process Note Access
353. with views in private groups do you need to create further views on the Setup tab If the Views section contains no expandable folders at all no views are available and you must create at least one view on the Setup tab before you can begin using NetGuard If the Views section contains one or more expandable folders labeled Private you have already created one or more views in private groups Which Types of Groups are You Able to Create Views in Depending on your user rights you may be able to create and edit views in the following types of groups Private and shared Private but not shared Shared but not private None at all in which case you simply rely on views created by others and placed in shared groups Typically only a few people in an organization are able to create and edit views in shared groups For example the surveillance system administrator may create and maintain a number of views and place them in shared groups When NetGuard users log in the views placed in the shared groups will automatically be available to them and the users will basically not need to create further views unless they want their own views in private groups To quickly determine which types of groups your user rights permit you to create and edit views in do the following 1 Select NetGuard s Setup tab Note Particular user rights may be required in order to access the Setup tab If you are not able to access t
354. www onssi com Page 73 Event Buttons Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights Event buttons are configurable buttons allowing users to manually trigger events from the Monitor application only available if the recording server has been installed as an application rather than a service and NetGuard EVS In NetGuard EVS event buttons are actually not buttons instead users manually trigger events by selecting them from a list You are able to configure event buttons to suit the exact needs of your organization Your main entry point for configuring event buttons is the Administrator window Clicking the Administrator window s Event Buttons button will open the Event Buttons window in which you specify each individual event button Event buttons can be used for a wide variety of purposes for example As start and stop events for use in the Camera Alert Scheduler window For example you can make a camera start or stop transferring images to the surveillance system when an event button is clicked in the Monitor As start and stop events for use in the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window For example you can make a camera use a higher frame rate when an event button is clicked in the Monitor or you can use an event button for manually triggering PTZ preset positions on event For triggering outputs Particular outpu
355. x 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 9 Assigning Shortcut Numbers to Cameras Users of NetGuard EVS can take advantage of a range of keyboard shortcuts some of which let the users toggle between viewing different cameras Such keyboard shortcuts include numbers which are used to identify each camera These camera shortcut numbers are specified in the Administrator To assign a shortcut number to a camera right click the camera name in question then select Edit from the menu that appears This will open the Camera Name and Number window in which you are able to specify a shortcut number to be used with the camera Note Camera shortcut numbers are only used in NetGuard EVS In other applications such as the Monitor or NetGuard the camera shortcuts cannot be used Tip More information about using keyboard shortcuts in NetGuard EVS is available in Using Standard Keyboard Shortcuts Editing Settings for Audio Sources To edit the settings for an audio source listed in the Device Manager section click the plus sign next to the device to which the audio source is attached select the required audio source then click the Settings button to open the Audio Device Settings window IMPORTANT The use of audio sources will impact the database capacity for storing video see Important Information about Using Audio for more information Disabling Enabling Cameras and Audio Sources Individual cameras and audio sources listed
356. xport should start You do this by typing the required date in the first Start Time field and the time in the second field OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 161 Tip Instead of manually specifying date and time you may use the Browse tab s Time Navigation features to move to the required start point then click the upper of the Export section s Set buttons This will automatically set the date and time of the viewed image in the Start Time fields In the End Time fields specify end date and time for the export You may use the Set button as described above Select the required camera from the Source list You must select an individual camera from the list as your source the Current View Sources option only applies when exporting in the database format Click the AVI JPEG Export button This will open a separate export dialog The export dialog will list the specified start time end time and camera 3 In the export dialog s Export Type section select the required export format AVI movie clip or JPEG still images 4 Select whether to add timestamps from the surveillance system to the exported images If selected small timestamps will appear in the corner of the images Example of timestamp arrow indicates actual position Date and time format may b
357. y Depending on user rights and configuration the Monitor may also be used for controlling PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras for manually starting and stopping cameras for manually triggering outputs etc From the Monitor you also have access to the Viewer with which you are able to browse and play back recordings print images send images via e mail and export entire video and audio sequences in a variety of formats The exact look and functionality of the Monitor depends on how the Monitor has been configured in the Administrator application Ask your surveillance system administrator if in doubt IMPORTANT When the Monitor application is installed recordings are only transferred to ProSight SMB while the Monitor application is running The Monitor application must therefore run whenever you want to be able to record images and audio from cameras on your surveillance system A running Monitor is also a prerequisite for viewing live recordings in remote access applications The Monitor application cannot run if the Administrator application is already running close down the Administrator application before running the Monitor application Once the Monitor application is running you can run the Administrator application as required Accessing the Monitor Access You access the Monitor application by double clicking the Monitor desktop shortcut When you start the Monitor all cameras scheduled to be online will start transferring images to ProSig
358. y be set up to move automatically when particular events occur PTZ On Event This is configured in the Administrator application With PTZ On Event the PTZ camera will automatically move to a particular preset position when a particular event occurs For example the PTZ camera may move to a preset position covering a door area when a door is opened Note PTZ On Event is stopped for all cameras as long as Manual Mode is used to allow cameras to be controlled manually OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 info onssi com www onssi com Page 106 PTZ cameras may be set up to move automatically when particular events occur PTZ On Event This is configured in the Administrator application With PTZ On Event the PTZ camera will automatically move to a particular preset position when a particular event occurs For example the PTZ camera may move to a preset position covering a door area when a door is opened Note PTZ On Event is stopped for all cameras as long as Manual Mode is used to allow cameras to be controlled manually PTZ cameras may be set up to move automatically when particular events occur PTZ On Event This is configured in the Administrator application With PTZ On Event the PTZ camera will automatically move to a particular preset position when a particular event occurs For ex
359. ystick control of PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras Joystick configuration control requires that a joystick is attached to the computer running NetGuard Note Even though joystick control is supported for a large number of PTZ cameras not all PTZ cameras may be joystick controlled Refer to the release note for information about joystick support for cameras Click the Joystick Control section s Setup button to access the Joystick Setup window The Joystick Setup window The Joystick Setup window s Joystick Axes section lets you configure the axes used for the joystick With a joystick you are typically able to navigate camera images three dimensionally along three axes an X axis a Y axis and a Z axis where the Z axis refers to the depth zoom level Example X Y and Z axes Button Check Box Description Invert y axis Lets you invert the Y axis This way you are able to select whether the camera should move up or down when you move the joystick towards you and away from you respectively z axis uses a relative positioning scheme Lets you specify whether the Z axis should use a relative or an absolute positioning scheme This will affect the way you zoom in and out with camera Default values Lets you use the joystick s default axes settings OnSSI ProSight SMB User Manual 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 inf

ProSight SMB User Manual - Moonblink Communications

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents